You are on page 1of 386

ProMAX 2D

Seismic Processing and


Analysis
copyright 1998 by Landmark Graphics Corporation

626075 Rev. B June 1998


Copyright 1998 Landmark Graphics Corporation
All Rights Reserved Worldwide

This publication has been provided pursuant to an agreement containing restrictions on its use. The
publication is also protected by Federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied
or distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human
or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, magnetic, manual, or otherwise,
or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of:

Landmark Graphics Corporation


15150 Memorial Drive, Houston, TX 77079, U.S.A.
Phone: 713-560-1000
FAX: 713-560-1410

Trademark Notices

Landmark, OpenWorks, SeisWorks, ZAP!, PetroWorks, and StratWorks are registered trademarks
of Landmark Graphics Corporation.
Pointing Dispatcher, Log Edit, Fast Track, SynTool, Contouring Assistant, TDQ, RAVE, 3DVI,
SurfCube, SeisCube, VoxCube, Z-MAP Plus, ProMAX, ProMAX Prospector, ProMAX VSP,
MicroMAX, DepthTeam and Landmark Geo-dataWorks are trademarks
of Landmark Graphics Corporation.
Technology for Teams is a service mark of Landmark Graphics Corporation.
ORACLE is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines, Inc.
AIMS is a trademark of GX Technology.
Motif, OSF, and OSF/Motif are trademarks of Open Software Corporation.
UNIX is a registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
SPARC, SPARCstation, Sun, SunOs and NFS are trademarks of SUN Microsystems.
X Window System is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
SGI is a trademark of Silicon Graphics Incorporated.
All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies or organizations.

Note

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be
construed as a commitment by Landmark Graphics Corporation. Landmark Graphics Corporation
assumes no responsibility for any error that may appear in this manual. Some states or jurisdictions
do not allow disclaimer of expressed or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore,
this statement may not apply to you.
ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing
and Analysis
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Mouse Button Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Exercise Organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Manual Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Agenda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Day 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Introductions, Course Outline, and Miscellaneous Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
ProMAX 2D Geometry - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
ProMAX 2D Geometry - Full Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
ProMAX 2D Geometry - Extraction with Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Trace Editing using Trace Statistics and DBTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Day 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Parameter Selection and Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Elevation Static Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Brute Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Neural Network First Break Picking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Refraction Static Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Stack Comparisons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Day 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Residual Statics Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Dip Moveout (DMO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
PostStack Signal Enhancement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Velocity: QC, Editing, Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
PostStack Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Additional Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis i


Contents

Manual Geometry Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Chapter Objectives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

ProMAX Geometry Assignment Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3


Geometry assignment path for this exercise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Land Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

View Shot Gathers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6


First look at the data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Load Geometry into the Spreadsheet and Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7


Description of Geometry for this line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Load Survey information to the spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Receivers spreadsheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Sources spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Patterns spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
TraceQC spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Binning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

View Database Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29

Load Geometry to the Trace Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33

Graphical Geometry QC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35


QC your Geometry Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36

Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38

ii ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Contents

Full Extraction Geometry Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1


Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

ProMAX Geometry Assignment Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3


Geometry assignment path for this exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Extract Database Files Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4


Database file extraction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Full Extraction Geometry Assignment with Editing . . . . . . 3-1


Chapter Goals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

ProMAX Geometry Assignment Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3


Geometry assignment path for this exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Extract Database Files Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4


Database file extraction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Spreadsheet completion and binning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Load Geometry to the trace headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seisic Processing and Analysis iii


Contents

Trace Editing using Trace Statistics and DBTools . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Chapter Objectives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Picking a Time Window for Statistical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Running the Trace Statistics Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Displaying the Statistics using DBTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Selecting the Data of Interest Graphically. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Focusing on a Range of data on the Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

iv ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Contents

System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1


Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Directory Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3


/ProMAX (or $PROMAX_HOME) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
/ProMAX/sys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
/ProMAX/port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
/ProMAX/etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
/ProMAX/scratch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
/ProMAX/data (or $PROMAX_DATA_HOME). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

ProMAX Data Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Program Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8


User Interface ($PROMAX_HOME/sys/bin/promax) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Super Executive Program (super_exec.exe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Executive Program (exec.exe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Processing Pipeline Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Types of Executive Processes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Stand-Alone Processes and Socket Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Ordered Parameter Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15


Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
OPF Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Database Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
File Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Parameter Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20


Creating a Parameter Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
ASCII Import to a Parameter Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
ASCII File Export from the Parameter Table Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Disk Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23


Secondary Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Tape Datasets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26


Tape Trace Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Tape Catalog System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28


Tape Catalog Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seisic Processing and Analysis v


Contents

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Parameter Selection and Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Chapter Objectives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Parameter Table Picking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3


Pick Parameter Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Parameter Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5


Test True Amplitude Recovery with Parameter Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

IF/ENDIF Conditional Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11


Compare Data With and Without Deconvolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

F-K Analysis and Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16


F-K Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Compare F-K filtered shots using an IF loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

Interactive Spectral Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22


Spectral Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

Elevation Static Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Chapter Objectives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Elevation Statics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3


Calculate Elevation Statics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Apply Elevation Statics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Apply User Statics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11


Apply External Statics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

vi ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Contents

Brute Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1


Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

RMS Velocity Field ASCII Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

CDP/Ensemble Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Display Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Neural Network First Break Picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1


Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Interactive NN First Break Training/Picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3


Interactive Training. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Batch Neural Network First Break Picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10


Pick First Breaks for entire survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Refraction Static Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1


Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Refraction Statics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3


Refraction Statics - 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Coordinate Based Refraction Statics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Apply Refraction Statics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13


Apply Refraction Statics to your data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seisic Processing and Analysis vii


Contents

Stack Comparisons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Chapter Objectives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Compare Stacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Chapter Objectives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Velocity Analysis Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

Velocity Analysis Precompute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4


Precompute Velocity Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Velocity Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Velocity Analysis Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Using the Volume Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Velocity Analysis PD Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16

Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18

Residual Statics Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Chapter Objectives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

Autostatics Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Data Preparation for Input to Residual Statics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4


Data preparation and horizon picking for residual statics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Calculation of Residual Statics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9


Autostatics calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

QC and Application of Residual Statics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12


Compare Static Solutions in the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Compare Autostatics Stacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

viii ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Contents

Compare two or more Autostatics Stacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

External Model Autostatics Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

External Model Autostatics Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18


Create Eigen Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30

Dip Moveout (DMO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1


Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Common Offset Binning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3


Determine trace binning parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Assign DMO offset bins to the data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12

DMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Apply DMO to the data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
Final Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20

Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21

Poststack Signal Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1


Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

F-X Decon, Dynamic S/N Filtering, and BLEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3


Signal Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3

Trace Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7


Use Trace Math to view differences between stacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7

Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seisic Processing and Analysis ix


Contents

Velocity: QC, Editing, Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Chapter Objectives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

Velocity Viewer/Point Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3


Smooth RMS velocities, and convert to interval velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3

Velocity Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8


Shift smoothed RMS velocities to final datum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Shift interval velocities to final datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Output a single interval velocity function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11

Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12

PostStack Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

Chapter Objectives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

PostStack Migration Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3

Tapering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4

Poststack Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5


Apply FK migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
Apply Phase Shift Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
Apply FD Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
Compare Migrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11

Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-12

Appendices

Appendix 1: Additional Geometry Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Geometry Core Path Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2


How to Decide on the Primary Geometry Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Transferring the Database to Trace Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

x ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Contents

Details of the Geometry Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4


Steps Performed by Inline Geom Header Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Valid Trace Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Valid Trace Number Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Steps Performed By Extraction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Between Extraction and Geom Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Geometry Load Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Pre-Geometry Database Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9


Pre Geometry Initialization flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Complete the Spreadsheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Inline Geometry Header Load after Pre-Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13


Load Geometry to Trace Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Appendix 2: Supergathers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1


Create Supergather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Create Supergather and Horizontally Stack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Appendix 3: Alternate Velocity Analysis Methods . . . . . . . . . 3-1


CVS Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Interactive Velocity Analysis (IVA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Appendix 4: Database/Header Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Header Manipulation Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2


Apply a Linear Moveout Correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seisic Processing and Analysis xi


Contents

Appendix 5: Training Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Reference Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2


Organization of Ordered Parameter Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
PostStack Migration Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Apply Statics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Reference Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5


Datum Statics Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Geometry Assignment Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Promax Directory Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Promax Data Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Flows and Data Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9


Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Datasets: Seismic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Datasets: OPF-TRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Datasets: OPF-SRF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Datasets: OPF-SIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Datasets: OPF-CDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Datasets: OPF-CHN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Datasets: OPF-OFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Datasets: OPF-PAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

xii ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Preface

Preface
About The Manual
This manual is intended to accompany the instruction given during the
standard ProMAX 2D course. Because of the power and flexibility of
ProMAX, it is unreasonable to attempt to cover all possible features and
applications in this manual. Instead, we try to provide key examples and
descriptions, using exercises which are directed toward common uses of
the system. For more progressive training please take Advanced 2D.

The manual is designed to be flexible for both you and the trainer.
Trainers can choose which topics, and in what order to present material
to best meet your needs. You will find it easy to use the manual as a
reference document for identifying a topic of interest and moving
directly into the associated exercise or reference. You are encouraged to
copy the exercise workflows and optimize them to your personal
situation.

How To Use The Manual


This manual is divided into chapters that discuss the key aspects of the
ProMAX system. In general, chapters conform to the following outline:

Introduction: A brief discussion of the important points of the topic


and exercise(s) contained within the topic.

Topics Covered and Chapter Objectives: Brief list of skills or


processes, in the order that they are covered in the exercise.

Topic Description: More detail about the individual skills or


processes covered in the chapter.

Exercise: Details pertaining to each skill in an exercise, along with


diagrams and explanations. Examples and diagrams will assist you
during the course by minimizing note taking requirements, and
providing guidance through specific exercises.

Chapter Summary: A brief list of skills the chapter was designed to


train.

This format allows you to glance at the topic description to either


quickly reference an implementation, or simply as a means of refreshing
your memory on a previously covered topic. If you need more
information, see the Exercise sections of each topic.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1


Preface

Conventions

Mouse Button Help


This manual does not refer to using mouse buttons unless they are
specific to an operation. MB1 is used for most selections. The mouse
buttons are numbered from left to right so:

MB1 refers to an operation using the left mouse button. MB2 is the
middle mouse button. MB3 is the right mouse button.

Actions that can be applied to any mouse button include:

Click: Briefly depress the mouse button.

Double Click: Quickly depress the mouse button twice.

Shift-Click: Hold the shift key while depressing the mouse button.

Drag: Hold down the mouse button while moving the mouse.

Mouse buttons will not work properly if either Caps Lock or Nums Lock
are on.

Exercise Organization
Each exercise consists of a series of steps that will build a flow, help
with parameter selection, execute the flow, and analyze the results.
Many of the steps give a detailed explanation of how to correctly pick
parameters or use the functionality of interactive processes.

The flow examples list key parameters for each process of the exercise.
As you progress through the exercises, familiar parameters will not
always be listed in the flow example.

The exercises are organized so that your dataset is used throughout the
training session. Carefully follow the instructors direction when
assigning geometry and checking the results of your flow. An
improperly generated dataset or database may cause a subsequent
exercise to fail.

2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Preface

Manual Organization
The manual will take you through a typical workflow of a geoscientist
processing a land 2D seismic dataset. The processing functions of
ProMAX will be introduced and discussed as they appear in the
workflow.

Processing WorkFlow
1. Geometry Assignment Field Data

2. Trace Editing

3. Parameter Selection

4a. Elevation Statics

4b. Refraction Statics Pick First Breaks

5. Brute Stack

6. Velocity Analysis

7. Residual Statics

8. Dip Moveout (DMO)

9. PostStack Signal Enhancement

10. PostStack Migration Velocity Modeling

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 3


Preface

4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Agenda

Agenda

Day 1

Introductions, Course Outline, and Miscellaneous Topics

ProMAX 2D Geometry - Manual

Input Data into the Spreadsheet


CDP Binning
Loading Geometry to Trace Headers
QC Database Attributes

ProMAX 2D Geometry - Full Extraction

Database File Extraction

ProMAX 2D Geometry - Extraction with Editing

Database File Extraction


Spreadsheet Completion and CDP Binning
Loading Geometry to Trace Headers

Trace Editing using Trace Statistics and DBTools

Running Trace Statistics


Display Trace Statistics using DBTools
Selecting Bad Traces with DBTools

System Overview

Directory Structure
Program Execution
Ordered Parameter Files
Parameter Tables
Disk Datasets
Tape Datasets

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1


Agenda

Day 2

Parameter Selection and Analysis

Parameter Table Picking


Parameter Test
IF/ENDIF Conditional Processing
F-K Analysis and Filtering
F-K Filtering Comparisons
Interactive Spectral Analysis (ISA)

Elevation Static Corrections

Elevation Statics Discussion


Apply Elevation Statics
Apply User Statics

Brute Stack

RMS Velocity Field ASCII Import


Brute Stack with Elevation Statics

Neural Network First Break Picking

Interactive NN First Break Training/Picking


Batch Neural Network First Break Picking

Refraction Static Corrections

Refraction Statics
Refraction Statics Calculation - coordinate based
Apply Refraction Statics
Stack with Refraction Statics

Stack Comparisons

Compare Stacks

Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer

Velocity Analysis Precompute


Velocity Analysis
Volume Viewer/Editor

2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Agenda

Day 3

Residual Statics Corrections

Data Preparation for Input to Residual Statics


Calculation of Residual Statics
QC and Application of Residual Statics
External Model Autostatics

Dip Moveout (DMO)

Common Offset Binning


DMO
Final Stack

PostStack Signal Enhancement

F-X Decon, Dynamic S/N Filtering, and BLEND


Trace Math

Velocity: QC, Editing, Modeling

Velocity Viewer/Point Editor


Velocity Manipulation

PostStack Migration

Poststack Migration Processes


Tapering
Poststack Migration

Additional Topics

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 3


Agenda

4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1
Manual Geometry Assignment
Geometry Assignment is designed to create the ProMAX Database Files and load header
information into the trace headers of ProMAX data. The sequence of steps, or flows, depends
upon available information. This chapter serves as an introduction to different approaches of
geometry assignment. The Geometry Overview section in the Reference Manual and online
helpfile provides further details of the geometry assignment process.

Geometry is clearly one of the most important aspects of processing. These next three chapters are
examples of a difficult, an easy, and a most common approach to geometry assignment.

Topics covered in this chapter:

Chapter Goals
Geometry Assignment Map
Land Geometry
View Shot Gathers
Load Geometry in Spreadsheet and Database
View Database Attributes
Load Geometry to the Trace Headers
Graphical Geometry QC
Chapter Summary

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-1


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

Chapter Objectives

1. Geometry Assignment Field Data

We are at step one, Geometry Assignment, of our processing workflow.


Geometry is probably the longest and most difficult subject in the
manual, as it is in a normal processing sequence. If we can get the
geometry correct we are well on our way to having the best possible
seismic data for the interpreter. Upon completion of this chapter you
should:

Understand what the Ordered Parameter Files (OPFs) represent

Edit the OPFs via the Geometry Spreadsheet

View Trace Header values for Geometry Attributes

Import Observer Data into the Geometry Spreadsheet

QC and Edit Geometry via DBTools and XDB

Understand ProMAX Sign Conventions

Understand what a Pattern Represents

Understand the steps of Binning

Graphically QC Geometry with Farr Displays

1-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

ProMAX Geometry Assignment Map

All Possible Geometry Assignment Paths

UKOOA ASCII
O.B. Field
Data
Notes

UKOOA
Import SEG-? Input
Spreadsheet
Manual Import
Input
Database
Import
Seismic Data
(ProMAX)
Extract
Database
Files
Geometry Inline Geom
Spreadsheet Header Load

Ordered Parameter Disk Data


Output
Files
Disk Data
Output

Inline Geom
Header Load
Valid Trace
Numbers
Overwrite
Trace Headers
Seismic Data Seismic Data
(ProMAX) (ProMAX)

Geometry assignment map for output to disk

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-3


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

Geometry assignment path for this exercise


ProMAX geometry assignment is designed to be both flexible and
robust. The previous map, however, displays the complicated price we
pay for that flexibility. The following map shows a simplified path that
we will use for geometry assignment in this exercise.

Manual Geometry Assignment Path

O.B. Notes ASCII


and
Survey
Information

Spreadsheet
Import
Manual
Input Field
Data

SEG-Y Input

Geometry
Spreadsheet Inline Geom
Header Load

Ordered Parameter
Files
Disk Data
Output

Seismic Data
(ProMAX)

1-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

Land Geometry

The 2D Land Geometry Spreadsheet is used to assign the geometry. The


spreadsheet is an editor used to input/modify geometry information,
residing in the ProMAX database. While you can manually key in data,
the spreadsheet has options to import geometry information, such as
source and receiver coordinates from ASCII files.

If the input seismic data has pertinent geometry information in the trace
headers, you can extract this information using the process Extract
Database Files prior to working with the spreadsheet.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-5


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

View Shot Gathers

First look at the data


Before we get into the geometry assignment steps, let us look at the data
that we will be using. First we will create a workspace by adding an Area
and Line, then we will build a flow to display the raw shots.

1. From the Area menu add a new area.

Give your area a descriptive name that has meaning to you. You
might want to use your name in this case.

2. When the Line menu appears add a new line named Watson
Rise.

3. Add the following flow.

Editing Flow: 1.1-View Shots

Add Delete Execute View Exit

SEG-Y Input
Type of storage to use: ------------------------------Disk Image
Enter DISK file path name: -----------------------------------------
-----------/misc_files/2d/segy_0_value_headers
----Default the remaining parameters----
Automatic Gain Control
----Default all parameters for this process----
Trace Display
Number of ENSEMBLES (line segments)/screen: -------2
----Default the remaining parameters----

4. Execute the flow.

Use the Next Ensemble icon to move through all 20 shots for this
line. Notice how the shot rolls onto the spread and that there is a
discontinuity between channels 60 and 61.

1-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

Load Geometry into the Spreadsheet and Database

Description of Geometry for this line


The following figure and table describe the acquisition geometry for the
Watson Rise line.
Pattern for Source 1
388.5

Channel 1 60 61 120

Station 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 . . . 446 449 450 451 452 453 . . . 505 506 507 508

Pattern for Source 2


392.5

Channel 1 60 61 120

Station 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 . . . 446 449 450 451 452 453 . . . 505 506 507 508

Pattern for Source 16

448.5

Channel 1 60 61 120

Station 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 . . . 447 450 451 452 453 454 . . . 506 507 508 509

20 Sources
120 Channels
55 ft. Receiver Interval
220 ft. Source Interval
2 Second Record Length
4 ms Sample Rate
Dynamite Source

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-7


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

Observers Report

Group Int.=55 Shot Int.=220 Sample Int.=4 ms # of Chan=120

Shot File Depth Offset Uphole Chan Chan Chan. Chan


Loc. no. Time 1 60 61 120

388.5 2 93 0 22 387 446 449 508

392.5 3 93 0 20 387 446 449 508

396.5 4 93 50 20 387 446 449 508

400.5 5 93 0 23 387 446 449 508

404.5 6 93 15 18 387 446 449 508

408.5 7 93 0 24 387 446 449 508

412.5 8 93 0 20 387 446 449 508

416.5 9 93 0 19 387 446 449 508

420.5 10 93 0 17 387 446 449 508

424.5 11 93 0 20 387 446 449 508

428.5 12 93 0 22 387 446 449 508

431.5 13 93 0 19 387 446 449 508

436.5 14 93 0 19 387 446 449 508

440.5 15 93 0 20 387 446 449 508

444.5 16 93 0 21 387 446 449 508

448.5 17 93 0 23 388 447 450 509

452.5 18 93 0 22 392 451 454 513

456.5 19 93 0 20 396 455 458 517

458.5 22 93 0 20 398 457 460 519

464.5 23 93 0 20 404 463 466 525


Source. and Receiver First Live Last Live Source Type =
Azimuth=90 degrees Station=387 Station=525 Shot, Units=ft

1-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

Load Survey information to the spreadsheet


In this exercise, you will assign geometry to the 2DTutorial dataset,
Watson Rise, using the geometry spreadsheet. Two flows are required
to accomplish this task.

One flow will use the spreadsheet as an editor to automatically


enter data to the database.

The second flow will load the geometry from the database to the
trace headers.

The following spreadsheet guide is designed to help you assign


geometry to the line you are processing in the class. It is by no means a
complete description of all the capabilities. Please consult the Reference
Manual for additional documentation.

1. Build the following flow :

Editing Flow: 1.2-Geometry Spreadsheet

Add Delete Execute View Exit

2D Land Geometry Spreadsheet*

2. Execute the flow.

The following 2D Land Geometry Assignment window appears:

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-9


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

3. Select Setup, and fill out the menu with information from the
observers log.

4. Select to assign midpoints by Matching pattern numbers using


first live chan and station.

5. Enter source and receiver station interval, and leave the survey
azimuth blank as it will be calculated later.

6. Enter the first and last live station numbers, select Yes to base
source station numbers on receiver station numbers. Set source type
to shot holes, and units are feet. You may also enlarge the font.

7. Select OK when you have entered all the information.

1-10 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

Receivers spreadsheet
1. Select Receivers from the main spreadsheet window.

2. Mark all rows active by clicking MB3 on any of the numbered


blocks under the Mark Block column. Marked blocks will turn a
different color. Station, X, and Y are required in 2D geometry.

3. Insert enough rows to accommodate all receiver stations.

Notice how many rows are present in your default spreadsheet


(this number will vary depending on your font). There are 139
receiver stations in this survey, so you will need to insert rows
into the default spreadsheet so that there are 139 rows.

Select Edit Insert, and insert the proper number of rows after
the last marked block. Scroll to the bottom of the spreadsheet. If
you created more than 139 blocks, mark the excess blocks by
selecting block 140 with shift-MB2. This will select all blocks
numbered 140 and greater. Select Edit Delete, and OK.

After you are certain that you have exactly 139 rows in the
spreadsheet, mark all rows active with MB3 again, so that you
can easily work with the entire spreadsheet.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-11


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

4. Fill in the appropriate values for the Station column.

Mark the Station column by clicking MB1 on the Station column


heading. From the menu bar select Edit Fill. This will bring up a
popup menu. Enter 387 as a starting value and an increment of 1,
then select OK. (An easier way to fill, is to click MB2 on the column
header. This immediately causes the fill window to display.)

5. Follow the same procedure to fill the X coordinate, starting with 0


and incrementing by 55 and the Y coordinate with all 0s.

This is an old land line, for which there were no XY values recorded.
We will make up some fake XYs assuming that the line is straight,
runs from West to East, and has a nominal receiver spacing of 55ft.

6. Import the Elevation values from an ASCII file.

When working with ASCII file import there are three required
steps:
Open the ASCII file.

Define which numbers are in which columns.

Define which cards or rows to exclude from the import.

1-12 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

7. Select File Import to import ASCII elevation values. Two


windows will pop up allowing you to open an ASCII file.

1
3

4 2
In the Filter box of the File Import Selection window, enter the
directory path (.../misc_files/2d/*) to your ASCII file,
followed by /*, then select Filter. Select the ASCII filename and
OK.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-13


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

8. Click Format and enter a name recs for a format description


containing ASCII import column definition information. You will
see a new window at this point.

Example ASCII Import Column Definition

9. In the Column Import Definition menu, click on a parameter


attribute name, such as station, to define that columns information
Note that the selection turns white.
NOTE:
Look at the Mouse Button help descriptions at the bottom of the ASCII text window.
Note that they reflect the MB1 press and drag operation for column definition

10. Highlight the columns that contain the numbers for the attribute
you selected by holding down MB1 and dragging from left to right.

11. Repeat the previous two steps for elevations.

1-14 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

Switch to card or row exclusion mode.


12. Now freeze the column definitions by clicking MB3 over the
Parameter Column.

13. Click MB3 with the cursor positioned over the word Station or
one of the other columnar attributes.

NOTE:

Look at the Mouse Button help descriptions at the bottom of the ASCII text window.
Note that they now reflect block selection and deletion options.

14. Use MB1 to select the first row to exclude, and MB2 to select the
last row to exclude, and press Ctrl-d. You will want to exclude title
rows, blank rows, and rows with information that you do not want
to import.

This writes a Ignore Record for Import message on all the defined
rows.

15. There are also rows at the bottom of this file containing source
information that need to be ignored.

16. From the main import menu, select Filter.

This will check for any cards with inappropriate information, and
allows you to interactively delete them.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-15


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

17. From the main import menu, select Apply.

18. Select Merge existing station values with matching station data
and click OK.

This will add the elevations to your spreadsheet by matching the


station numbers in the ASCII file with those already in the
spreadsheet. The import windows will disappear.

19. Leave the Static column filled with zeros.

20. Make sure you have 139 stations defined in your receiver
spreadsheet, and the information looks correct.

21. Select File Save.

22. Use the display capabilities in the spreadsheet to QC the imported


elevations.

Select View View All XYGraph from the menu bar.


Click MB1 in the X column heading, and MB2 in the Elev
column heading.

1-16 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

After the XYGraph displays, select Color Bar from the


menu.

Notice that the X Coordinate is displayed on the horizontal axis,


the Elevations are on the vertical axis, and the Station numbers
are represented by color.
Activate the Notebook icon. When this icon is activated, you can
select a point in the XYGraph, and automatically jump to that
line in the spreadsheet.
Select a point in the XYGraph with MB1.
This is a powerful QC tool. You can easily locate bad values in
the XYGraph, and then edit the value in the spreadsheet.
Exit the XYGraph by selecting File Exit Confirm.
23. Use the File Exit pulldown menu to save the information and
exit the receiver spreadsheet.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-17


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

Sources spreadsheet
1. Select Sources from the main spreadsheet window.

2. The Sources (SIN) spreadsheet appears. You must go through the


same procedure as in the Receiver spreadsheet to make 20 rows in
the spreadsheet to accommodate the 20 shots in this survey.

3. Fill the Station column. Start at 388, and increment by 4.

Notice that you did not input 388.5 as the observers report states.
This is because the spreadsheet will only accept integer
numbers. You will specify this half station difference using the
skid column later.

Also notice that the x, y, and z values updated. Because you told
the spreadsheets that the source and receiver station numbers
were linked, the Sources spreadsheet uses the x, y, and z values
entered in the Receivers spreadsheet. Therefore, the source
elevations are the elevations of the previous receiver location. In
our case, you need to interpolate elevations between receiver
locations. We will do this later from the Database tool.

Finally, you can see from the Observers Report that a few of the
shot station numbers do not increment by four. Fix the station
numbers for those shots in the spreadsheet now. Notice that the
x, y, and z values change as you change the Station number.

1-18 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

4. Fill the Source column to match the Station column. Source


numbers are user defined and could be set to any value. Some
people prefer to use this number as a counter, and will fill the
column starting with 1, and incrementing by 1.

5. Fill the FFID column starting at 2, and incrementing by 1. Notice


from the Observers Report that there is a gap in the FFID numbers
between 19, and 22. Enter this gap in the spreadsheet.

6. Enter the offsets of 50 and 15 for the appropriate stations in the


Offset column of the spreadsheet. Instead of North, South, East,
and West, ProMAX uses the following sign convention:

Offset Sign Convention


(-) Negative Offset

Direction of Increasing
Station Numbers
Shot (x,y) (Source Azimuth)

(+) Positive Offset

7. Scroll the spreadsheet to the right, and fill the Skid column with
27.5. This is where you specify the inline offsets that move the
shots from integer station numbers to half station numbers.
ProMAX uses the following sign convention:

Skid Sign Convention


Source Azimuth
Shot (x,y) (Direction of Increasing
Station Numbers)

(-) Negative Skid (+) Positive Skid

Toward lower stations Toward higher stations

8. Import the Uphole time and Hole Depth information from the
ASCII file using the same procedure as described in the Receivers
spreadsheet.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-19


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

Patterns spreadsheet
At this point, leave the Sources spreadsheet, and fill in the patterns
spreadsheet. After filling out the pattern, you will finish the remainder
of the Sources spreadsheet.

There are two methods of defining patterns. If the shot gap stays in a
constant location, use the Static Gap Method. This method is only
available if you chose to assign midpoints by matching pattern numbers
using first live chan and station in the setup menu. If your shot gap
changes locations, use the Dynamic Gap Method. This method is
available if you chose either to assign midpoints by matching pattern
numbers using first live chan and station, or matching pattern number
using pattern station shift.

Static Gap Method:


Static Gap Size and Gap Chan
Definition

Stn 387 Stn 446 Stn 449 Stn 508

Ch 1 Ch 60 Ch 61 Chn 120

Shot

Sources Spreadsheet
Gap Chan=0 and Gap Size=0

Patterns Spreadsheet
Pat Min Max/Gap Chan Rcvr Rcvr Rcvr
Chan Chan Inc MinChan MaxChan Inc

1 1 60 1 387 446 1

1 61 120 1 449 508 1

In this method gap size and location is specified in the Patterns


spreadsheet.

In the Sources and Receivers spreadsheets, each shot or receiver used


one row of the spreadsheet. In the Pattern spreadsheets, one pattern can
use as many rows of the spreadsheet as necessary.

1-20 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

Dynamic Gap Method:

Dynamic Gap Size and Gap Chan


Definition

Stn 387 Stn 446 Stn 449 Stn 508

Ch 1 Ch 60 Ch 61 Chn 120

Shot

Sources Spreadsheet
Gap Chan=60 and Gap Size=2

Patterns Spreadsheet

Pat Min Max/Gap Chan Rcvr Rcvr Rcvr


Chan Chan Inc MinChan MaxChan Inc

1 1 120 1 387 506 1

In this method, you specify the first and last channels and stations in
the Pattern spreadsheet. The shot gap size and location is specified
in the Sources spreadsheet.

1. Select Patterns from the main spreadsheet window.

You will now define your cable configuration, that is the relationship
of channels to receiver locations. When you enter the Pattern
spreadsheet for the first time, a window will appear that asks you to
enter some information about the number of channels.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-21


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

2. Enter 120 for the maximum number of channels, select Constant


number of channels/record, then OK. These values will be used for
error checking when you exit the patterns spreadsheet. If you define
your pattern for more or less than 120 channels, the error column in
the spreadsheet fills with ***** and will force you to correct your
error before exiting the Patterns spreadsheet. If you need to edit the
number of channels later select Edit NChans.

3. Since our shot gap is in a constant location, fill in the Pattern


spreadsheet using the Static Gap Method.

4. Select File Exit to save the information, and exit the Patterns
spreadsheet.

5. Return to the Sources spreadsheet, and reorder the columns so that


the pattern description columns will be displayed next to the Station
column.

With the default column order, you cannot see the Station
column after scrolling the spreadsheet to the right.
To change the displayed order of the columns select
Setup Order the menu bar.
Follow the mouse button help, and click MB1 in the column
heading for Station, Pattern, Num Chn, Shot Fold, 1st Live Sta,
1st Live Chn, Gap Chan Dlt, Gap Size Dlt, and Static.

1-22 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

Finish the selection by clicking MB2 in the column heading for


Static. The columns you selected will now move to the left of the
spreadsheet as pictured below.

6. Fill in the Pattern column with ones.

This tells the Sources spreadsheet to use pattern number 1 from the
Patterns spreadsheet. Recall that you only defined one pattern for
this survey.

7. Fill the Num Chn column with 120.

This specifies that there are 120 channels for each shot on this
survey.

8. You cannot edit the Shot Fold* column.

This column will be calculated and filled when you assign midpoints
later in the exercise.

9. Fill the 1st Live Sta column with information from the Observers
Report.

Notice that the first live station for this survey is 387 for all but the
last five shots.

10. Fill the 1st Live Chn column with ones.

This specifies that the first live channel for each shot is 1.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-23


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

11. Leave the Gap Chan Dlt column blank, and leave the Gap Size Dlt
column filled with zeros.

The information entered in these two columns depends on which


method you chose for entering the pattern in the Patterns
spreadsheet. Since you chose the Static Gap method, you have
already specified the shot gaps size and location in the pattern
spreadsheet, and do not need to specify it here. If you had chosen the
Dynamic Gap method, you would enter the shot gaps location in
Gap Chan Dlt, and the shot gaps size in Gap Size Dlt.

12. Leave the Static column filled with zeros.

If the information were available, you could enter any previously


calculated datum static values in this column.

13. Select File Save.

1-24 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

14. Display a basemap of both the shots and receivers, and measure the
station azimuth.

Select View View All Basemap

Notice that the receivers are displayed as a plus + sign, and the
shots are displayed as an asterisk *. Also notice the two offset
shots. To get a better view of the shots select Display Sources
Control Points White.
Now select the Cross Domain icon to allow you to measure the
station azimuth. Press MB3 (notice the mouse button help) near the
first shot on the line, and drag the mouse to the end of the line.
While still holding down MB3, make note of the azimuth (Azi)
readout in the mouse button help. For this line, the azimuth should
be 90 degrees.
Select File Exit Confirm in the XYGraph display.

15. From the main Land Geometry window, select Setup, and enter 90
for the Nominal Survey Azimuth. Select OK to save the
information an close the window.

16. Make sure that you only have 20 rows in the Sources spreadsheet.

17. Exit the Sources spreadsheet by selecting File Exit.

TraceQC spreadsheet
1. The information in the traces spreadsheet will be calculated by the
binning process. You can not edit this information.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-25


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

Binning
1. Select Bin from the main window. There are three steps to be
completed in order:

Assign Midpoints

One of the several Binning options

Finalize database

2. Select Assign midpoints by: Matching pattern numbers using


first live chan and station, and then select OK.

In this case the Assignment step is performing the following


calculations:

Computes the SIN and SRF for each trace and populates the
TRC OPF.

Computes the Shot to Receiver Offset (Distance.)

Computes the Midpoint coordinate between the shot and


receiver.

Computes the Shot to Receiver Azimuth.

1-26 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

An Assignment Warning window will pop up warning that some or


all of the data in the Trace spreadsheet will be overwritten. Click
Proceed.

A number of progress windows will flash on the screen as this step


runs. A final Status window appears notifying that you
Successfully completed geometry assignment. Click Ok.

If this step fails, you have an error in your spreadsheets somewhere.


Not much help is given to you, but, the problems are usually related
to the spread and/or pattern definitions.

3. Choose Binning with a method of Add source and receiver


stations, user defined OFB parameters. Fill in the parameters in
the bottom of the window, and select OK.

This step calculates CDP numbers for each trace by adding source
and receiver numbers. The first CDP will be 775 (387 + 388), the last
CDP will be 989 (464 + 525). This step also creates the OFB ordered
parameter file.

4. Select OK in the final status window when successfully completed.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-27


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

Select Finalize Database, then click OK.

Clcik OK in the final status window when successfully


completed.
Click Cancel in the Land 2D Binning window to exit the binning
window.

5. Open the Receivers spreadsheet.

6. The binning step filled in the data in the Traces spreadsheet. You
can QC this information from a basemap. From the Receivers
spreadsheet, select View View All Basemap.

7. Highlight the Cross Domain icon. Click and hold MB1 near a
source location to see which receivers contributed to that shot. Drag
your mouse to the end of the line to see the receiver range change.
Click and hold MB2 near a receiver location to see which shots
contributed to that receiver.

1-28 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

8. Select File Exit Confirm to exit the basemap display.

9. Select File Exit from the Receivers spreadsheet.

10. Select File Exit from the main spreadsheet window.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-29


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

View Database Attributes

1. Select Exit from the Flow Editing menu of the User Interface.

In the Flows menu select Database. The DBTools window allows


basic viewing and editing of the 8 orders (spreadsheets) of the
database: LIN, TRC, SRF, SIN, CDP, CHN, OFB, PAT. The contents
of the OPF files are summarized in Table 1:

Table 1: Organization of Ordered Parameter Files


LIN (Line) Contains constant line information, such as final datum, type of
units, source type, total number of shots.

TRC (Trace) Contains information varying by trace, such as FB Picks, trim


statics, source-receiver offsets.

SRF Contains information varying by surface receiver location, such


(Surface location) as surface location x,y coordinates, surface location elevations,
surface location statics, number of traces received at each
surface location, and receiver fold.

SIN Contains information varying by source point, such as source


(Source Index #) x,y coordinates, source elevations, source uphole times, nearest
surface location to source, source statics.

CDP (Common Contains information varying by CDP location, such as CDP x,y
Depth Point) coordinates, CDP elevation, CDP fold, nearest surface location.

CHN (Channel) Contains information varying by channel number, such as


channel gain constants and channel statics.

OFB Contains information varying by offset bin number, such as


(Offset Bin) surface consistent amplitude analysis. OFB is created when
certain processes are run, such as surface consistent amplitude
analysis.

PAT (Pattern) Contains information describing the recording patterns.

1-30 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

To graphically QC and edit the database select Database


XDB Database Display.

2. From the XDB window select Database Get.

3. Project SRF elevations into SIN.

By projecting the SRF elevations into the SIN elevations you will
correct for the skid of the elevation being on the half station. For
example, compare the land geometry database for receiver and shot
elevations at station number 428. You see that they both read an
elevation of 842 feet. Looking at the elevation for station number
429, however, you see an elevation of 845.3. From the observer notes
and geometry assignment you remember that the shot is actually at
station location 428.5, and therefore at an elevation around 843.6.

To fix the source elevations go to the attribute selection window, and


click on the SIN order, then GEOMETRY ELEV. After this is
displayed, click on the SRF order, then GEOMETRY ELEV.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-31


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

While SRF Geometry Elev is highlighted, select


New Project Sin.

In the popup window, type in ELEV for the new attribute name,
then click on OK. Your new attribute will be plotted. Notice how
station 428 has been corrected.

4. To save this new attribute, select Database Save. In the popup


list, click on the name of the new attribute,
SIN:GEOMETRY:ELEV. Select OK from the overwrite warning
and from the acknowledgment window, then Exit the Database tool.

5. You can verify the source elevation was corrected by going back
into the source spreadsheet.

1-32 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

6. There are several useful QC plots that can be made from the
DBTools or from the XDB Database Display. Some examples are
listed below.

XDB CDP: GEOMETRY: FOLD


(DBTools: double click on FOLD from CDP tab)

Used to check CDP fold for variations.

XDB SIN: GEOMETRY: NCHANS


(DBTools: double click on NCHANS from SIN tab)

Used to check for variations in number of channels per source.

XDB 3D XYGraph: TRC:SRF, SIN, OFFSET


(DBTools: View Predefined SIN-SRF-offset)

Used to check the live receivers for each shot.

XDB 3D XYGraph: TRC: OFFSET, CDP, SIN


(DBTools: View Predefined offset-CDP-SIN)

Used to check offset distribution in CDPs for velocity analysis place-


ment and DMO binning.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-33


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

Load Geometry to the Trace Headers

1. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: 1.3-Inline Header Load

Add Delete Execute View Exit

SEG-Y Input
Type of storage to use: ------------------------------Disk Image
Enter DISK file path name: -----------------------------------------
-----------/misc_files/2d/segy_0_value_headers
----Default the rest of the parameters----
Inline Geom Header Load
Primary header to match database: ---------------------FFID
Secondary header to match database: ----------------None
Match by valid trace number?: -------------------------------No
Drop traces with NULL CDP headers?: --------------------No
Drop traces with NULL receiver headers: ----------------No
Verbose diagnostics?: --------------------------------------------No
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: -----------Shots-with geometry
New, or Existing, File?: ----------------------------------------New
Record length to output: ------------------------------------------0.
Trace sample format: ----------------------------------------16 bit
Skip primary disk storage?: -----------------------------------No

2. In SEG-Y Input, select Disk Image and enter the path given to you
by your instructor for the raw shot dataset.

3. In Inline Geom Header Load, select FFID as the Primary and None
as the Secondary headers to match the database.

A trace is excluded from further processing if it is not described in


the geometry.

4. In Disk Data Output, enter a name for a new output dataset.

5. Execute the flow.

1-34 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

6. Edit your flow 1.1-View Shots to check the trace headers of your
dataset.

Editing Flow: 1.1-View Shots

Add Delete Execute View Exit

<SEG-Y Input>
Disk Data Input
Select dataset: ----------------------------Shots-with geometry
Trace read option: -----------------------------------------------Sort
Select Primary trace header entry:--------------SIN
Select secondary trace header entry:---OFFSET
Select order list for dataset----------------------------------*:*
Automatic Gain Control
----Default all parameters for this process----
Trace Display
Number of ENSEMBLES (line segments)/screen: -------2
Do you want to use variable trace spacing?------------Yes
----Default the remaining parameters----

7. Change the sort order as shown in the flow.

8. In the trace display use variable trace spacing to highlight the


source gap in the shots.

9. While viewing the data in Trace Display, use the dx/dt icon to
measure the first break velocity of a few shots. Write down this
value as it will be used later in the Graphical Geometry QC section.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-35


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

Graphical Geometry QC

Graphical Geometry QC* is a macro designed to quickly find mistakes


in your geometry assignment. The process applies linear moveout to
shots and splices multiple shots together in a vertical fashion based on
receiver surface station. This display is often referred to as a Farr
display.

Shot LMO Shot Farr Display


t

Mistakes in geometry assignment show up as obvious anomalies, such


as the last panel in the Farr display. In other cases, you may find that
your first break data is far from being flat, with your onset of energy
coming in much later with longer offsets. Another indicator is when all
first breaks tend to line up at 100 ms, but for one shot they line up at 200
ms. Check the geometry in these areas.

1-36 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

QC your Geometry Assignment


1. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: 1.4-Graphical Geometry QC

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Graphical Geometry QC*


Select input trace data file: ----------Shots-with geometry
SIN and SOU_SLOC range of dataset: ---------------------*:*
dB/sec gain value to apply: ------------------------------------6.
Specify LMO velocity function(s): -------------------1:0:8000
Additional bulk shift: -------------------------------------------100
Maximum time for each spliced trace: -------------------400
Maximum number of shots (traces) to vertically splice: -
--------------------------------------------------------------------4
Resulting maximum number of traces per screen: --139
Select display device: -------------------------------This Screen
Scalar for sample value multiplication: ---------------------1.
Trace scaling option: -----------------------------------Individual

2. Select your input dataset name.

3. Specify the LMO velocity function.

An editor appears for specifying a velocity function; 1:0:8000


should work fine. In this example, we will enter one LMO velocity
for the entire dataset. Therefore, we only need to specify one
primary value (1) for the first shot, one absolute offset value (0 ft),
and one velocity (8000 ft/sec).

4. Enter 4 for the Maximum number of shots to vertically splice.

For a quick check of all the data, you could input all 20 shots instead
of 4.

5. Set the maximum number of traces per screen to 139. This will
cover the full spread 120 channels plus 5 extra shots 4 channels
apart.

6. Select Individual for Trace scaling option, if you have any spikes
in your data.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-37


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

The spikes will bias the entire screen scaling scalar and cause many
of the traces to appear having zero amplitude.

7. Execute the flow using MB2.

This process uses Screen Display for displaying your data, instead
of Trace Display. When you execute with MB2, the data is
automatically displayed.

Use the Header tool icon to check vertically constant SRF_SLOC


trace header values. Note what shot you are on.

Look for anomalies, such as a back spread shifted 50-100 ms higher


than a front spread, or severely undercorrected or overcorrected
shots. Also, any reversed traces should remain at a constant surface
location.

NOTE:

If you find any mistakes you must go back to the spreadsheets and correct them.
Then you will need to rebin. Finally, to get the proper trace headers loaded you need
to rerun the inline header load flow.

1-38 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

Chapter Summary

Upon completion of this chapter you should be able to answer the


following questions:

Do you understand what the Ordered Parameter Files represent

Can you edit the OPFs via the Geometry Spreadsheet

Can you view Trace Header values for Geometry Attributes

Can you import Observer Data into the Geometry Spreadsheet

Can you QC and edit Geometry via DBTools and XDB

Do you understand ProMAX Sign Conventions

Do you understand what a Pattern Represents

Do you understand the steps of Binning

Can you graphically QC Geometry with Farr Displays

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-39


Chapter 1: Manual Geometry Assignment

1-40 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 2
Full Extraction Geometry
Assignment
Geometry Assignment is designed to create the ProMAX Database Files and load header
information into the trace headers of ProMAX data. The sequence of steps, or flows, depends
upon available information. This chapter serves as a simplistic alternative approach to Chapter 1
for geometry assignment. The Geometry Overview section in the Reference Manual and online
helpfile provides further details of the geometry assignment process.

In this chapter we will cover the steps necessary to assign geometry to a line if all of the required
information is present in the trace headers of the input dataset. This approach can be very quick
and effective for reprocessing data.

Topics covered in this chapter:

Database file extraction

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 2-1


Chapter 2: Full Extraction Geometry Assignment

Chapter Objectives

1. Geometry Assignment Field Data

This is an alternative method of completing step one, Geometry


Assignment, of our processing workflow. For reprocessing data this
method can be very fast and efficient. Upon completion of this chapter
you should:

Understand how to Remap SEG-Y headers

Create Database Files from Extraction

2-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 2: Full Extraction Geometry Assignment

ProMAX Geometry Assignment Map

Geometry assignment path for this exercise


The following map shows the path that we will use for geometry
assignment in this exercise.

Full Extraction Field


Data

SEG-Y Input

Seismic Data
(ProMAX)
Extract
Database
Files

Disk Data
Output
Ordered Parameter
Ordered Parameter
Files
Files

Seismic Data
(ProMAX)

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 2-3


Chapter 2: Full Extraction Geometry Assignment

Extract Database Files Method

Database file extraction


In this exercise you will assign geometry to the 2D user tutorial dataset,
Watson Rise. This only involves extracting geometry information from
the input SEG-Y trace headers and outputting the trace data in ProMAX
format.

If the input SEG-Y headers are fully populated then you are done and
the data should be ready to be processed without touching the
spreadsheet or having to run an Inline Geometry Header Load. A fully
populated trace header must have the following valid values:

Shot X Y and Station


Receiver X Y and Station
CDP X Y and CDP number

1. Create a new Line.

Make sure you are in your Area. Go to the Line level of the ProMAX
User Interface and click on Add. Type in the line name,
Database Full Extraction, and then press Enter.

2-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 2: Full Extraction Geometry Assignment

2. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: 1.1-Extract Database Files

Add Delete Execute View Exit

SEG-Y Input
Type of storage to use: ----------------------------- Disk Image
Enter DISK file path name: -----------------------------------------
-----------------------------------/misc_files/2d/segy2d_remap
Remap SEGY header values?: -------------------------------Yes
Input/override trace header entries: ---------------------------
sou_sloc,,4I,,181/srf_sloc,,4I,,185/
cdp_sloc,,4I,,189/cdp_x,,4I,,193/
cdp_y,,4I,,197/cdp_elev,,4I,,201/
Extract Database Files
Is this a 3D survey: ------------------------------------------------No
Data Type: --------------------------------------------------------LAND
Source index method: -----------------------------------------FFID
Receiver index method: ------------------------------STATIONS
Mode of operation: ----------------------------------OVERWRITE
Pre-geometry extraction?: ---------------------------------------No
Extract CDP binning?: -------------------------------------------Yes
Minimum cdp bin in survey: ----------------------775
Calculate trace midpoints coordinates?: -----------------Yes
Extract OFB binning?: --------------------------------------------No
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: --------raw shots w/ extract
New, or Existing, File?: ----------------------------------------New
Record length to output: ------------------------------------------0.
Trace sample format: ----------------------------------------16 bit
Skip primary disk Storage?: -----------------------------------No

3. In SEG-Y Input, select Yes for Remap SEGY header values.

This input SEG-Y file already has most geometry information in its
trace headers. The remap option allows information in non-standard
or extended header locations to be accessed and assigned to a
ProMAX header word. The ProMAX spreadsheets use the values for
SOU_SLOC, SRF_SLOC, CDP_SLOC, CDP_X, CDP_Y, and

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 2-5


Chapter 2: Full Extraction Geometry Assignment

CDP_ELEV. These are not standard SEG-Y headers, and therefore


must be stored in the extended header section of the SEG-Y data.
Choose the remap option to read in these values.

4. In Extract Database Files, select No for Pre-Geometry database


initialization.

Enter FFID to Source index method. Select Stations for Receiver


Index Method. However, coordinates can be selected since the SEG-
Y file contains both station numbers and x,y values.

Select No for Pre-Geometry initialization because you have receiver


information in the input SEG-Y headers and thus the SRF OPF
directory will be properly built.

NOTE:

If no receiver information exists in the input trace headers and you answer no to Pre-
Geometry Initialization, the job will fail. If no receiver information exists in the
input trace headers and you answer Yes to Pre-Geometry Initialization, the SRF
OPF will be built anyway. You must then enter the missing information into the
Receivers spreadsheet, as well as define pattern information in the Sources and
Patterns spreadsheets.

5. Output a new ProMAX disk dataset.

6. Execute the flow.

7. Now confirm that the SEG-Y headers were complete by doing some
QC plotting from the Database to check that the trace, receiver,
shot, and CDP OPF files look proper.

8. Did you notice how the receivers (SRF GEOMETRY X_COORD)


were out of order?

9. Do you believe the extracted geometry?

2-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 2: Full Extraction Geometry Assignment

Chapter Summary

Upon completion of this chapter you should be able to answer the


following questions:

Can you Remap SEG-Y headers

Can you Create Database Files from Extraction

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 2-7


Chapter 2: Full Extraction Geometry Assignment

2-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 3
Full Extraction Geometry
Assignment with Editing
Geometry Assignment is designed to create the ProMAX Database Files and load header
information into the trace headers of ProMAX data. The sequence of steps, or flows, depends
upon available information. This chapter serves as the most likely alternative approach to
Chapters 1 and 2 for geometry assignment. The Geometry Overview section in the Reference
Manual and online helpfile provides further details of the geometry assignment process.

In this chapter we will cover the steps necessary to assign geometry to a line if some of the
required information is present in the trace headers of the input dataset.

Topics covered in this chapter:

ProMAX Geometry Assignment Map


Database file extraction
Spreadsheet completion and binning
Inline Geometry Header Load

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 3-1


Chapter 3: Full Extraction Geometry Assignment with Editing

Chapter Goals

1. Geometry Assignment Field Data

This is another alternative method of completing step one, Geometry


Assignment, of our processing workflow. For reprocessing data this
method can be fast and efficient. Upon completion of this chapter you
should:

Better Understand OPF/SpreadSheet operations

Learn How to Finalize the Database

Load Geometry to Trace Headers

3-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 3: Full Extraction Geometry Assignment with Editing

ProMAX Geometry Assignment Map

Geometry assignment path for this exercise


The following map shows the path that we will use for geometry
assignment in this exercise.

Extraction + Editing Field


Data

SEG-Y Input

Seismic Data
(ProMAX)
Extract
Database
Files
Geometry
Geometry
Spreadsheet
Spreadsheet

Ordered Parameter
Ordered Parameter Disk Data
Output
Files
Files

Inline Geom
Header Load
Valid Trace
Numbers
Overwrite
Trace Headers Seismic Data

(ProMAX)

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 3-3


Chapter 3: Full Extraction Geometry Assignment with Editing

Extract Database Files Method

Database file extraction


In this exercise you will assign geometry to the 2D user tutorial dataset,
Watson Rise. You will first extract geometry information from the input
SEG-Y trace headers. You will then need to update and add information
using the geometry spreadsheet. You will also have to do the CDP
binning. Three flows are required to accomplish this task:

Flow 1 reads a SEG-Y file, extracts information from the headers,


writes it to the database/spreadsheets, and outputs a ProMAX disk
dataset.

Flow 2 uses the spreadsheet as an editor to update/add values, and


to automatically enter the information into the database.

Flow 3 loads the geometry information to the trace headers of the


ProMAX dataset.

The following spreadsheet guide is designed to help you assign


geometry to the line you are processing in the class. It is by no means a
complete description of all the capabilities. Please consult the Reference
Manual for additional documentation.

1. Create a new Line.

Make sure you are in your Area. Go to the Line level of the ProMAX
User Interface and click on Add. Type in the line name,
Database Partial Extraction, and then press Enter.

3-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 3: Full Extraction Geometry Assignment with Editing

2. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: 1.1-Extract Database Files

Add Delete Execute View Exit

SEG-Y Input
Type of storage to use: ----------------------------- Disk Image
Enter DISK file path name: -----------------------------------------
-----------------------------------/misc_files/2d/segy2d_remap
Remap SEGY header values?: -------------------------------Yes
Input/override trace header entries: ---------------------------
-----------------sou_sloc,,4I,,181/srf_sloc,,4I,,185/
Extract Database Files
Is this a 3D survey: ------------------------------------------------No
Data Type: --------------------------------------------------------LAND
Source index method: -----------------------------------------FFID
Receiver index method: ------------------------------STATIONS
Mode of operation: ----------------------------------OVERWRITE
Pre-geometry extraction?: ---------------------------------------No
Extract CDP binning?: -------------------------------------------Yes
Minimum cdp bin in survey: ----------------------775
Calculate trace midpoints coordinates?: -----------------Yes
Extract OFB binning?: --------------------------------------------No
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: --------raw shots w/ extract
New, or Existing, File?: ----------------------------------------New
Record length to output: ------------------------------------------0.
Trace sample format: ----------------------------------------16 bit
Skip primary disk Storage?: -----------------------------------No

3. In SEG-Y Input, select Yes for Remap SEGY header values.

This input SEG-Y file already has most geometry information in its
trace headers. The remap option allows information in non-standard
or extended header locations to be accessed and assigned to a
ProMAX header word. The ProMAX spreadsheets use the values for
SOU_SLOC and SRF_SLOC These are not standard SEG-Y
headers, and therefore must be stored in the extended header section
of the SEG-Y data. Choose the remap option to read in these values.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 3-5


Chapter 3: Full Extraction Geometry Assignment with Editing

4. In Extract Database Files, select No for Pre-Geometry database


initialization.

Enter FFID to Source index method. Select Stations for Receiver


Index Method. However, coordinates can be selected since the SEG-
Y file contains both station numbers and x,y values.

Select No for Pre-Geometry initialization because you have receiver


information in the input SEG-Y headers and thus the SRF OPF
directory will be properly built.

NOTE:

If no receiver information exists in the input trace headers and you answer no to Pre-
Geometry Initialization, the job will fail. If no receiver information exists in the
input trace headers and you answer Yes to Pre-Geometry Initialization, the SRF
OPF will be built anyway. You must then enter the missing information into the
Receivers spreadsheet, as well as define pattern information in the Sources and
Patterns spreadsheets.

5. Output a new ProMAX disk dataset.

This disk dataset is used in Flow 03 as input to the Inline Geom


Header Load.

6. Execute the flow.

Spreadsheet completion and binning


1. Since some of the OPF files were not complete in the Database, you
will need to build the following flow:

Editing Flow: 1.2-Geometry Spreadsheet

Add Delete Execute View Exit

2D Land Geometry Spreadsheet*

2. Execute the flow.

3-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 3: Full Extraction Geometry Assignment with Editing

3. Select Setup from the main window.

Since you used Extract Database Files, the default option in setup is
to Assign midpoints by existing index number mappings in the TRC.
Reset the units to feet, leave the rest of the Setup window blank and
select OK.

4. Select Receivers from the main window.

All of this information should be correct. You may notice that some
of the receivers are not in sequential order. You can sort these by
selecting Setup Sort Ascending. Choose OK in the warning
window that appears, and then select the Station column with MB2.
This will sort the spreadsheet by ascending station number. Check
for incorrect information, and select File Exit. Choose Proceed
and then OK to the following messages.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 3-7


Chapter 3: Full Extraction Geometry Assignment with Editing

5. Select Sources.

All of this information should be correct. Check for incorrect


information, and select File Exit.

6. The Patterns spreadsheet option should be grayed out and not


functional.

The Patterns spreadsheet and the pattern related columns in the


Sources spreadsheet are deactivated when you select Assign
midpoints by existing index number mappings in the setup menu. If
Assign midpoints by pattern number in the source and pattern
spreadsheets is selected, the pattern columns in the Sources
spreadsheet and the Patterns spreadsheet would have to be
completed.

7. Select Bin.

NOTE:

You must execute all three options available in this window. Each of these options
may be time consuming in the case of 3D data, so they are separated out in this
menu.

Select Assign midpoints by existing index number mappings in the


TRC. Click OK, then select Proceed in the warning window.

3-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 3: Full Extraction Geometry Assignment with Editing

Select only one of the three Bin midpoints options. In this case,
select Using previously assigned CDP numbers, user defined
OFB parameters, since our input SEGY trace headers included
CDP numbers. Use a Binning bias of 0 and an offset bin center
increment of 55. Click OK. Select OK when successfully
completed.

8. Select Finalize Database, then OK. This step fills in the LIN order

of the database with the final survey information.

Click OK in the Status window when successfully completed.

Click Cancel in the Land 2D Binning window to exit Bin.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 3-9


Chapter 3: Full Extraction Geometry Assignment with Editing

9. Select File Exit from the main Geometry window.

10. Exit the current flow.

From the Flows window, access the database with the Database
global command option, and check various attributes for
correctness.

Load Geometry to the trace headers


1. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: 1.3-Header Load

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Read data from other lines/surveys: ----------------------No
Select Dataset: -------------------------raw shots w/extract
Trace read option: --------------------------------------------Get All
Read the data multiple times?: -------------------------------No
Process trace headers only?: ---------------------------------Yes
Override input datas sample interval: --------------------No
Inline Geom Header Load
Match by valid trace number?: ------------------------------Yes
Drop traces with NULL CDP headers?: --------------------No
Drop traces with NULL receiver headers?: ---------------No
Verbose Diagnostics?: --------------------------------------------No
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: ---------raw shots w/extract
New, or Existing, File?: --------------------------------Overwrite
Record length to output: ------------------------------------------0.
Skip primary disk Storage?: -----------------------------------No

2. In Disk Data Input, select Yes to Process trace headers only.

We will write the geometry information to the trace headers without


reading the input traces. This dataset was written by ProMAX after
using Extract Database Files, the TRC (trace flag) is valid. (If the
TRC flag is not set to valid, you cannot process trace headers only).

3-10 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 3: Full Extraction Geometry Assignment with Editing

All traces in the dataset are described in the geometry. If there are
any missing traces in the input file, the job will fail.

3. In Inline Geom Header Load, select Yes to Match by valid trace


number. (There will be no Primary or Secondary headers listed.)

The Inline Geom Header Load uses the valid trace number found on
each trace of each ensemble to assign geometry.

4. In Disk Data Output, select Overwrite the input dataset.

Overwrite allows us to process and overwrite only the trace header


files (HDRs.)

If the existing HDR files are not large enough to accept the data to
write out, you must:

Change Process trace headers only in Disk Data Input to No.

Change Overwrite to New in Disk Data Output.

Name a new ProMAX disk dataset name in Disk Data Output.

5. Execute the flow.

6. Create a simple display flow to check the trace headers of your


dataset.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 3-11


Chapter 3: Full Extraction Geometry Assignment with Editing

Chapter Summary

Upon completion of this chapter you should be able to answer the


following questions:

Are you confident in OPF/SpreadSheet operations

What does it mean to Finalize the Database

Can you Load Geometry to Trace Headers

3-12 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 4
Trace Editing using Trace
Statistics and DBTools
In this chapter you will see how DBTools can be used to select which traces are sent to Trace
Display for visual trace editing. You will run the Trace Statistics process to generate some values
computed from the trace data that can be used to isolate bad traces. You will then only send the
shots that contain these bad traces to Trace Display to visually edit these bad traces.

This chapter will serve as your introduction to the real power the DBTools program.

Topics covered in this chapter:

Picking a time window to use for Statistical Analysis


Running the Trace Statistics Process
Displaying the Statistics using DBTools
Selecting the data to be viewed in Trace Display graphically using
the DBTools displays.
Focusing on a range of data on the Histogram

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 4-1


Chapter 4: Trace Editing using Trace Statistics and DBTools

Chapter Objectives

2. Trace Editing

In this chapter you learn some of the power of DBTools using it to


isolate bad traces via Trace Statistics. Upon completion of this chapter
you should:

Understand how to run Trace Statistics

Be functional at using DBTools

Understand how the Pointing Dispatcher communicates between


processes

4-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 4: Trace Editing using Trace Statistics and DBTools

Picking a Time Window for Statistical Analysis

1. Build the following flow to display a shot record:

Editing Flow: 2.1-Edit by Trace Stats

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: --------------------------Shots - with geometry
----Default all other parameters----
Trace Display
----Default all parameters----

2. Execute the flow.

3. We first need to pick a time gate that will be used by the Trace
Statistics process. On the first shot select Picking Pick
Miscellaneous Time Gate... Trace Stats Gate by
AOFFSET.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 4-3


Chapter 4: Trace Editing using Trace Statistics and DBTools

Pick the top of the gate following the first break times. Use MB3 to
add NEW LAYER for the bottom gate. Track the end of the
reflection data in this case, near 2 seconds:

Time Gate Top

Time Gate Bottom

When you are done picking choose File Exit/Stop Flow. Select Yes
to save edits before exiting.

4-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 4: Trace Editing using Trace Statistics and DBTools

Running the Trace Statistics Process

1. Edit the existing flow.

Editing Flow: 2.1-edit by trace stats

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: -----------------------------shots - w/ geometry
----Default all other parameters----
Trace Statistics
Types of trace statistics to compute --------------- select all
Use first breaks or time gates?-------------------TIME GATE
Time gate reference----------------------------------------- Time 0
Get analysis gates from the DB?--------------------------- Yes
Select time gate parameter file----------- Trace Stats Gate
Form of statistical output------------ Database & Headers
>Trace Display<

2. Execute the flow.

Trace statistics is run to write the statistical attribute values to the


database.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 4-5


Chapter 4: Trace Editing using Trace Statistics and DBTools

Displaying the Statistics using DBTools

1. Edit the existing flow.

Editing Flow: 2.1-edit by trace stats

Add Delete Execute View Exit

>Disk Data Input<


>Trace Statistics<
Disk Data Input
Select dataset: -----------------------------shots - w/ geometry
Trace Read Option -----------------------------------------------Sort
Interactive Data Access ----------------------------------------Yes
Primary sort key ----------------------- Source index number
Secondary sort key ---------------------------------------------none
Sort order ---------------------------------------------------------------*/
----Default all other parameters----
Database/Header Transfer
Direction of Transfer: Load TO header FROM database
Number of parameters -------------------------------------------- 4
First DB parameter ----------- TRC TRCSTATS PRE_FB_A
First Header ----------------------------------------------PRE_FB_A
Second DB parameter ------- TRC TRCSTATS TRC_AMPL
Second Header ---------------------------------------- TRC_AMPL
Third DB parameter ----------- TRC TRCSTATS T_SPIKES
Third Header --------------------------------------------- T_SPIKES
Fourth DB parameter ------ TRC TRCSTATS AMPDECAY
Fourth Header ---------------------------------------- AMPDECAY
Trace Display
----Default all parameters----

2. Use Database/Header Transfer to selectively move the values of


interest to the headers. You will need to User Define the trace
header words.

3. Execute this flow and wait for the display.

4-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 4: Trace Editing using Trace Statistics and DBTools

You should get the IDA window and the trace display window. Make
sure IDA is working by using the forward and reverse arrows.

4. Add a header plot of the TRC_AMPL in the Trace Display: View


Header Plot Configure TRC_AMPL.

5. Leave the Trace Display running, but, exit from the flow menus and
press Database on the User Interface.

The main DBTools window will appear.

6. Generate a pre-defined Source Fold map.

Use the View Predefined Source fold map pull down menu.

For this example you may elect to change the background to white
and then change to a monochrome color using the Options White

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 4-7


Chapter 4: Trace Editing using Trace Statistics and DBTools

Background and Color Monochrome and Color Edit pull


downs respectively.

7. Because of the dynamic range of the data large amplitude spikes


obscure the rest of the data. Lets attack this problem by taking the
log of the trace amplitude Edit Attribute Apply a Function.

8. Lets call the new attribute LOG_AMP with an infotype of


TRCSTATS. Select OK when done.

4-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 4: Trace Editing using Trace Statistics and DBTools

9. Use the View Summary Statistics... pull down menu to


generate a Summary Statistics plot of OFFSET, SIN, SRF, and
the trace statistics: TRC_AMPL, LOG_AMP, T_SPIKES, and
AMP_DECAY from the TRC database. (Click MB1 on OFFSET
and then CNTL MB1 on the others and then click on OK to
generate the histogram display.

It should look like this:

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 4-9


Chapter 4: Trace Editing using Trace Statistics and DBTools

10. Arrange the displays as shown below:

4-10 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 4: Trace Editing using Trace Statistics and DBTools

Selecting the Data of Interest Graphically

1. Highlight a range of points on the TRC_AMPL or the LOG_AMP


histogram that covers the range of anomalously high amplitudes.

drag the mouse (holding MB1) across this region

Using MB1, drag the cursor across the anomalous range of the plot.
The points will turn red and all the others will turn black.

Notice that a few points will also turn red on the other displays. This
is the power of the summary statistics plot. This demonstrates that
the high amplitude traces are distributed amongst the shots and
receivers. (i.e. there does not appear to be any single high amplitude
shot or receiver, these are randomly placed traces)

2. SELECT these points using the Select All Highlighted pull


down.

The points that were highlighted red will turn pink indicating that
they are now selected

Notice the difference between HIGHLIGHTING points and actually


SELECTING them.

3. PROJECT these points to the shot domain using the Project


SIN pull down so that we know which shots contain these high
amplitude traces.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 4-11


Chapter 4: Trace Editing using Trace Statistics and DBTools

Notice that some of the shots on the shot location map turned black:

These are the shots that have the high amplitude traces.

4. PD these shots to the trace display using the bow and arrow PD
icon so that the display will only show you the shots that contain
the high amplitude traces.

This way you are only presented with a few shots to examine instead
of the entire data volume of shots. You should only have three shots
available to page through in the display.

5. Open a Trace Kill table using the Picking Kill Traces... pull
down. Assign this table a name such as Kill list from
DBTools interactive and choose CHAN as the secondary
sort key for the list.

4-12 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 4: Trace Editing using Trace Statistics and DBTools

6. Add the bad traces to the kill list.

7. To check that you killed the proper traces select the Paintbrush
icon which toggles on and off the kills.

8. Repeat the sequence choosing different ranges of different


attributes until you are happy that you have found all of the bad
traces and have added them to the list.

9. As you change the attribute of interest add a header plot of that


attribute to the Trace Display to help identify the anomalous traces.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 4-13


Chapter 4: Trace Editing using Trace Statistics and DBTools

Focusing on a Range of data on the Histogram

A logical extension to this exercise would be to re-display the histogram


excluding the anomalously high traces so that a more focused range
of information can be analyzed.

1. Highlight the one line of the histogram that represents all of the
traces except for the highest amplitude on the TRC-AMPL plot.

Notice that almost the entire plot remains red except for a few traces
that are marked in black.

2. SELECT these traces, thus excluding the extremely high


amplitude traces using the Select All Highlighted pull down.

4-14 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 4: Trace Editing using Trace Statistics and DBTools

3. Now we need to re-focus the display on only the selected data


points using the Focus On Selection pull down.

new range of
interest?

4. You can now highlight a new range of points of interest.

5. Select these new points using the Select All highlighted pull
down.

6. Project these points to the shot map using the Project SIN pull
down.

7. PD these shots to the Trace Display using the bow and arrow PD
icon.

You can always reset the range of points displayed on the histogram by
using the Focus On All pull down.

8. After all traces of interest have been selected to the edit list, Exit
from the Trace Display, saving the results. Exit from the main
DBTools window with the Database Exit pull down, select
Commit to save the LOG_AMP attribute you created to the
database.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 4-15


Chapter 4: Trace Editing using Trace Statistics and DBTools

Chapter Summary

Upon completion of this chapter you should be able to answer the


following questions:

Can you run Trace Statistics

Are you functional at using DBTools

Are you comfortable with how PD is communicating between


processes

4-16 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 5
System Overview
In this chapter we discuss some of the behind-the-scenes program operation, as well as the basic
ProMAX framework. Understanding the ProMAX framework and its relationship to the UNIX
directory structure can be useful. The ability to manipulate the various components of the line
database, such as ordered parameter files, from the User Interface is critical to smooth operation
of the software.

Topics covered in this chapter:

Directory Structure
Program Execution
Ordered Parameter Files
Parameter Tables
Disk Datasets
Tape Datasets

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-1


Chapter 5: System Overview

Chapter Objectives

This chapter gives the processor a basic understanding of how ProMAX


interacts with the operating system. Upon completion of this chapter
you should:

Understand where and how data files are stored

Know where menus and program executables are stored

Know how data passes through a ProMAX flow

5-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 5: System Overview

Directory Structure

/ProMAX (or $PROMAX_HOME)


The directory structure begins at a subdirectory set by the
$PROMAX_HOME environmental variable. This variable defaults to
/ProMAX, and is used in all the following examples. Set the
$PROMAX_HOME environment variable to
/my_disk/my_world/ProMAX to have your ProMAX directory tree
begin below the /my_disk/my_world subdirectory.

All ProMAX development tools are included within the following


subdirectories: /ProMAX/sys/lib, /ProMAX/sys/obj, /ProMAX/port/
src, /ProMAX/port/bin, /ProMAX/port/include and /ProMAX/port/
man.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-3


Chapter 5: System Overview

ProMAX Directory Structure


$PROMAX_HOME /sys /exe
(default=.../ProMAX) exec.exe /frame
super_exec.exe /sdi
*.exe from program /3rd party
software
/bin
*.exe from command line

/lib
lib*.a

/plot
/port /help /promax
*.lok - Frame help
/lib/X11/app-defaults *.help -ASCII help
Application window
managers /promax3d
/promaxvsp
/menu /promax
*.menu
Processes
/promax3d
/promaxvsp
/misc
*_stat_math
*.rgb-colormaps
ProMax_defaults
/bin
start-up executable
/etc

config_file
product
install.doc
pvmhosts
qconfig
license.dat

/scratch

/queues

/data /area /line


(or $PROMAX_DATA_HOME)

5-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 5: System Overview

/ProMAX/sys
Software that is Operating System Specific resides in /ProMAX/sys
which is actually a symbolic link to subdirectories unique to a given
hardware platform, such as:

/ProMAX/rs6000 for IBM RS6000 workstations,

/ProMAX/sparc for Sun Microsystems Sparcstations running SunOS,

/ProMAX/solaris for Sun Microsystems Sparcstations and Cray 6400


workstations running Sun Solaris OS,

/ProMAX/sgimips for Silicon Graphics Indigo workstations using the


32 bit operating system and

/ProMAX/sgimips4 for Silicon Graphics Indigo and Power Challenge


workstations using the 64 bit operating system.

This link facilitates a single file server containing executable programs


and libraries for all machine types owned by a client. Machine specific
executables are invoked from the UNIX command line, located in
/ProMAX/sys/bin.

Operating System specific executables and libraries, called from


ProMAX, are located under /ProMAX/sys/exe. These machine-
dependent directories are named after machine type, not manufacturer,
to permit accommodation of different architectures from the same
vendor. Accommodating future hardware architectures will simply
involve addition of new subdirectories. Unlike menus, help and
miscellaneous files, a single set of executables is capable of running all
ProMAX products, provided the proper product specific license
identification number is in place.

Third party software distributed by ProMAX will now be distributed in


a subdirectory of /ProMAX/sys/exe using the companys name, thus
avoiding conflicts where two vendors use identical file names. For
example, SDIs CGM Viewer software would be in
/ProMAX/sys/exe/sdi and Frame Technologys FrameViewer would be
in /ProMAX/sys/exe/frame.

/ProMAX/port
Software that is Portable across all Platforms is grouped under a
single subdirectory /ProMAX/port. This includes menus and Processes
(/ProMAX/port/menu), helpfiles(/ProMAX/port/help), miscellaneous

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-5


Chapter 5: System Overview

files (/ProMAX/port/misc.) Under the menu and help subdirectories are


additional subdirectories for each ProMAX software product. For
instance, under /ProMAX/port/menu, you will find subdirectories for
ProMAX 2D (promax), ProMAX 3D (ProMAX3D), and ProMAX VSP
(ProMAXVSP.) Menus for additional products are added as new
subdirectories under /ProMAX/port/menu. If your system administrator
is not afraid of the LISP programming language you can have them
customize the ProMAX menus and defaults.

The .../ProMAX/port/bin contains a very special file Promax which is


the ProMAX start-up script. You may want to edit this file and
personalize it to your environment.

The .../ProMAX/port/lib/X11/app-defaults contains the color attributes


and window configurations for the individual applications.

/ProMAX/etc
Files unique to a particular machine are located in the /ProMAX/etc
subdirectory. Examples of such files are the config_file, which contains
peripheral setup information for all products running on a particular
machine, and the product file, which assigns unique pathnames for
various products located on the machine.

/ProMAX/scratch
The scratch area defaults to /ProMAX/scratch. This location can be
overridden with the environmental variable,
PROMAX_SCRATCH_HOME. We recommend you point this to the
biggest file system you have write permission. The DMO, Migrations,
and Spreadsheets are heavy users of this file system. We also
recommend that you periodically clean this file system.

/ProMAX/data (or $PROMAX_DATA_HOME)


The primary data partition defaults to /ProMAX/data, with new areas
being added as subdirectories beneath this subdirectory. This default
location is specified using the entry:

primary disk storage partition: /ProMAX/data 200

in the /ProMAX/etc/config_file. This location can also be set with the


environmental variable $PROMAX_DATA_HOME. We also
recommend that you point this to a large files system you can write to.

5-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 5: System Overview

ProMAX Data Directories


PROMAX_DATA_HOME
or
/Data

/Area
DescName Area subdirectory
and its files
Project
/Line
DescName
17968042TVEL
31790267TGAT 1) Parameter Table files
36247238TMUT
12345678CIND
Index and Map Dataset files
12345678CMAP
/12345678
HDR1 2) Dataset subdirectory
HDR2 and Header and Trace
Dataset files
TRC1
TRC2

/Flow1
DescName
TypeName 3) A Flow subdirectory
and its files
job.output
packet.job

/OPF.SIN 4) /OPF.SIN Database


subdirectory and
OPF60_SIN.GEOMETRY.ELEV
a non-spanned file

/OPF.SRF Database
/OPF.SRF subdirectory and a
#s0_OPF60_SRF.GEOMETRY.ELEV span file

Each region identifies a collection of files and directories which can be


summarized as the Area and Line separated into four main file types: 1)
Parameter Tables, 2) Trace/Trace Headers, 3) Flows, and 4) Ordered
Parameter Files database.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-7


Chapter 5: System Overview

Program Execution

User Interface ($PROMAX_HOME/sys/bin/promax)


Interaction with ProMAX is handled through the User Interface. As you
categorize your data into Areas and Lines, the User Interface
automatically creates the necessary UNIX subdirectories and provides
an easy means of traversing this data structure.

However, the primary function of the User Interface is to create, modify,


and execute processing flows. A flow is a sequence of processes that you
perform on seismic data. Flows are built by selecting processes from a
list, and then selecting parameters for each process. A typical flow
contains an input process, one or more data manipulation processes, and
a display and/or output process. All information, needed to execute a
flow, is held within a Packet File (packet.job) within each Flow
subdirectory. This Packet File provides the primary means of
communication between the User Interface and the Super Executive
program. See next section, Super Executive Program.

In addition, the User Interface provides utility functions for:

copying, deleting and archiving Areas, Lines, Flows, and seismic


datasets

accessing and manipulating ordered database files and parameter


tables

displaying processing histories for your flows

providing information about currently running jobs

The User Interface is primarily mouse-driven and provides point-and-


click access to the functions

5-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 5: System Overview

Program Execution

Super Executive Program (super_exec.exe)


Execution of a flow is handled by the Super Executive, which is
launched as a separate task by the User Interface. The Super Executive
is a high level driver program that examines processes in your flow by
reading packet.job and determines which executables to use. The
majority of the processes are subroutines linked together to form the
Executive. Since this is the processing kernel for ProMAX, many of
your processing flows, although they contain several processes, are
handled by a single execution of the Executive. Several of the processes
are stand-alone programs. These processes cannot operate under the

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-9


Chapter 5: System Overview

control of the Executive, and handle their own data input and output by
directly accessing external datasets. In these instances, the Super
Executive is responsible for invoking the stand-alone programs and, if
necessary, multiple calls to the Executive in the proper sequence.

The Packet File, packet.job, defines the processes and their type for
execution. The Super Executive concerns itself with only two types of
processes:

Executive processes

Stand-alone processes

Executive processes are actually subroutines operating in a pipeline,


meaning they accept input data and write output data at the driver level.
However, stand-alone processes cannot be executed within a pipeline,
but rather must obtain input and/or produce output by directly accessing
external datasets.

The Super Executive sequentially gathers all Executive-type processes


until a stand-alone is encountered. At that point, the Packet File
information for the Executive processes is passed to the Executive
routine (exec.exe) for processing. Once this is completed, the Super
Executive invokes the stand-alone program for processing, and then
another group of Executive processes, or another stand-alone process.
This continues until all processes in the flow have been completed.

Executive Program (exec.exe)


The Executive program is the primary processing executable for
ProMAX. The majority of the processes available under ProMAX are
contained in this one executable program.

The Executive features a pipeline architecture that allows multiple


seismic processes to operate on the data before it is displayed or written
to a dataset. Special processes, known as input and output tools, handle
the tasks of reading and writing the seismic data, removing this
burdensome task from the individual processes. This results in processes
that are easier to develop and maintain. The basic flow of data through
the Executive pipeline is shown below:

5-10 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 5: System Overview

Processing Pipeline Diagram

Disk Data
Input AGC
Trace Display
F-K Filter

InterProcess
Communication
Disk Data Output
Tool

Processing Pipeline

Each individual process will not operate until it has accumulated the
necessary traces. Single trace processes will run on each trace as the
traces come down the pipe. Multi channel processes will wait until an
entire ensemble is available. For example, in the example flow the FK

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-11


Chapter 5: System Overview

filter will not run until one ensemble of traces has passed through the
DDI and AGC. If we specify for the Trace Display to display 2
ensembles, it will not make a display until two shots have been
processed through the DDI, AGC and FK filter. No additional traces
will be processed until Trace Display is instructed to release the traces
that it has displayed and is holding in memory by clicking on the traffic
light icon or terminating its execution (but continuing the flow).

Note: All the processes shown are Executive processes and thus operate
in the pipeline. An intermediate dataset and an additional input tool
process is needed if a stand-alone process were included in this flow.

A pipeline process must accept seismic traces from the Executive,


process them, and return the processed data to the Executive.

5-12 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 5: System Overview

Disk Data Input, Tape Data


Input and standalone tools
always start new pipes
within a single flow

Disk Data
Input AGC

F-K Filter

Decon

Disk Data
Input
Disk Data
Output
NMO

CDP Stack

Bandpass
Filter

Disk Data
Output
One pipe must complete
successfully before a new
pipe will start processing

Multiple Pipes in One Flow

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-13


Chapter 5: System Overview

Types of Executive Processes


The table below describes the four types of processes defined for use in
the Executive.

Table 2: ProMAX Executive Process Types


Process Type Description

simple tools Accepts and returns a single seismic trace.

ensemble tools Accepts and returns a gather of seismic traces.

complex tools Accepts and returns a variable number of seismic traces such
as, stack. This type of process actually controls the flow of
seismic data.

panel tools Accepts and returns overlapping panels of traces to


accommodate a group of traces too large to fit into memory.
Overlapping panels are processed and then merged along
their seams.

Stand-Alone Processes and InterProcess Communication Tools


Some seismic processing tools are not well suited to a pipeline
architecture. Typically, these are tools making multiple passes through
the data or requiring self-directed input. These tools can be run inline in
a ProMAX job flow and appear as ordinary tools, but in reality are
launched as separate processes. The current version of ProMAX does
not provide the ability to output datasets from a stand-alone process.

InterProcess Communication tools start a new process and then


communicates with the Executive via UNIX interprocess
communications. InterProcess Communication tools have the singular
advantage of being able to accept and output traces in an asynchronous
manner.

5-14 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 5: System Overview

Ordered Parameter Files


Click to jump to the section
This section discusses the following issues relating to the Ordered
Parameter Files database:

Organization

Database Structure

File Naming Conventions

The Ordered Parameter Files database serves as a central repository of


information that you or the various tools can rapidly access.
Collectively, the ordered database files store large classes of data,
including acquisition parameters, geometry, statics and other surface
consistent information, and pointers between the source, receiver and
CDP domains. The design of the Orders is tailored for seismic data, and
provides a compact format without duplication of information.

The Ordered Parameter Files database is primarily used to obtain a list


of traces to process, such as traces for a shot or CDP. This list of traces
is then used to locate the index to actual trace data and headers in the
MAP file of the dataset. Once determined, the index is used to extract
the trace and trace header data from their files.

Organization
The Ordered Parameter Files contain information applying to a line and
its datasets. For this reason, there can be many datasets for a single set
of Ordered Database Files.

Ordered Parameter Files, unique to a line, reside in the Area/Line


subdirectory. The Ordered Parameter Files database stores information
in structured categories, known as Orders, representing unique sets of
information. In each Order, there are N slots available for storage of
information, where N is the number of elements in the order, such as the
number of sources, number of surface locations, or number of CDPs.
Each slot contains various attributes in various formats for one

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-15


Chapter 5: System Overview

particular element of the Order. The Orders are organized as shown in


the table below.

Table 3: Organization of Ordered Parameter Files


LIN (Line) Contains constant line information, such as final datum, type of
units, source type, total number of shots.

TRC (Trace) Contains information varying by trace, such as FB Picks, trim


statics, source-receiver offsets.

SRF Contains information varying by surface receiver location, such


(Surface location) as surface location x,y coordinates, surface location elevations,
surface location statics, number of traces received at each
surface location, and receiver fold.

SIN Contains information varying by source point, such as source


(Source Index #) x,y coordinates, source elevations, source uphole times, nearest
surface location to source, source statics.

CDP (Common Contains information varying by CDP location, such as CDP x,y
Depth Point) coordinates, CDP elevation, CDP fold, nearest surface location.

CHN (Channel) Contains information varying by channel number, such as


channel gain constants and channel statics.

OFB Contains information varying by offset bin number, such as


(Offset Bin) surface consistent amplitude analysis. OFB is created when
certain processes are run, such as surface consistent amplitude
analysis.

PAT (Pattern) Contains information describing the recording patterns.

OPF Matrices
The OPF database files can be considered to be matrices or flat files. The
OPF database files are not a relational database.

Each OPF is indexed against the OPF counter and there are various
single numbers per index. Note the relative size of the TRC OPF to the
other OPF files. The TRC is by far the largest contributor to the size of
the database on disk.

5-16 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 5: System Overview

SIN (Sources) Database

SRF (Receivers) Database

OPF Matrices

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-17


Chapter 5: System Overview

Database Structure
The ProMAX database was restructured for the 6.0 release to handle
large 3D land and marine surveys. The features of the new database
structure are listed below:

Each order is contained within a subdirectory under Area and Line. For
example, the TRC is in the subdirectory OPF.TRC.

There are two types of files contained in the OPF subdirectories:

Parameter: Contain attribute values. There may be any number of


attribute files associated with an OPF.

Index: Holds the list of parameters and their formats. There is only
one index file in each OPF subdirectory. The exception to this is the
LIN OPF. The LIN information is managed by just two files, one
index and one parameter, named LIN.NDX and LIN.REC.

OPF files are of two types:

Span: These files are denoted by the prefix, #s. Non-span files lack
this prefix. The TRC, CDP, SIN, and SRF OPF parameters are span
files. The first span of 10MB for each parameter file is always
written to primary storage. Span files are created in the secondary
storage partitions listed in the config_file as denoted with the OPF
keyword. Span files may be moved to any disk partition within the
secondary storage list for read purposes. Newly created spans are
written in the OPF denoted secondary storage partitions. All
subsequent spans are written to the secondary storage partitions
denoted by the OPF keyword in a round robin fashion until the
secondary storage is full. Then, subsequent spans are created in
primary storage. Span file size is currently fixed at 10 megabytes, or
approximately 2.5 million 4 byte values per span file.

Non-span: All other OPFs are non-span.

Given the fact that each parameter is managed by a file, it may be


necessary to increase the maximum number of files open limit on
some systems, specifically, SUN, Solaris and SGI. From the csh, the
following command increases the file limit to 255 files open, limit
de 255.

The geometry spreadsheet is a ProMAX database editor. Modifying


information within a spreadsheet editor and saving the changes will
automatically update the database. There is no longer an import or

5-18 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 5: System Overview

export from the geometry database to the ProMAX database files as was
required prior to the 6.0 release.

Database append is allowed. Data can be added to the database via the
OPF Extract tool or the geometry spreadsheet. This allows for the
database to be constructed incrementally as the data arrives.

There is improved network access to the database. Database I/O across


the network is optimized to an NFS default packet size of 4K. All
database reads and writes are in 4K pages.

Existing and restored 5.X databases are automatically converted to the


6.0 (and later) database format.

File Naming Conventions


Parameter file names consist of information type and parameter name,
preceded by a prefix denoting the Order of the parameter.

For example, the x coordinate for a shot in the SIN has the following
name: #s0_OPF60_SIN.GEOMETRY.X_COORD. Where #s0_OPF60
indicates a first span file for the parameter, _SIN denotes the Order,
GEOMETRY describes the information type of the parameter, and
X_COORD is the parameter name.

Index file names contain the three letter Order name. For example, the
index file for the TRC is called OPF60_TRC.

NOTE:

The index file for each Order must remain in the primary storage partition. Span
parameter files may be moved and distributed anywhere within primary and
secondary storage.

Within each Order, there are often multiple attributes, with each
attribute being given a unique name.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-19


Chapter 5: System Overview

Parameter Tables

Parameter Tables are files used to store lists of information in a very


generalized structure. Some examples may be mute functions or decon
design time gates. To increase access speed and reduce storage
requirements, parameter tables are stored in binary format. They are
stored in the Area/Line subdirectory along with seismic datasets, the
Ordered Parameter Files database files (those not in separate
directories), and Flow subdirectories.

Parameter Tables are often referred to as part of the database. Parameter


tables differ from the OPF database in OPF files contain many attributes
that are one number per something. Parameter tables contain more than
one number per something. For example a velocity function contains
multiple velocity-time pairs at one CDP.

Creating a Parameter Table


Parameter tables are typically created in three ways:

Processes store parameters to a table for later use by other


processes.

Parameter tables can be imported from ASCII files that were


created by other software packages or hand-edited by you.

Parameter tables can be created by hand using the Parameter Table


Editor which is opened by the Create option on the parameter table
list screen.

An example is the interactive picking of time gates within the Trace


Display process. After seismic data is displayed on the screen, you pull
down the Picking Menu and choose the type of table to create. The end
result of your work is a parameter table. If you were to pick a top mute,
you would generate a parameter table ending in TMUT. If you were
picking a time horizon, you would generate a table ending in THOR.
These picks are stored in tabular format, where they can be edited, used

5-20 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 5: System Overview

by other processes in later processing, or exported to ASCII files for use


by other software packages

WARNING:

Remember, you name and store the parameter tables in their specific Area/Line
subdirectory. Therefore, you can inadvertently overwrite an existing parameter
table by editing a parameter table in a different processing flow.

ASCII Import to a Parameter Table


File Import reads either ASCII or EBCDIC formatted files with fixed
columnar data into the spreadsheet editor.

When the application is initialized, two windows appear: the main


ASCII/EBCDIC File Import window and the File Import Selection
dialog. After a file has been selected, it is displayed, and you can select
rows. Note: Filter and Apply appear grayed out and are insensitive to
mouse button actions. After Format has been pressed and a columnar
format selected, Filter and Apply appear normally and are available for
use. The steps involved in performing a file import are as follows:

1. Select File: Select a file to import. If the text file does not contain
valid line terminators, use Width to set the line width and then re-
read the file.

2. Select Format: Select a previous format or create a new format.

3. Review or Edit Column Definitions: Review the previously defined


columns in an existing format by selecting all the columns. Review
the highlighted regions in the file display for accuracy. Columns
can either be edited by hand entering Start Col. and End Col.
values, or by performing click and drag column definition.

4. Save the Column Definition: Save any changes to the current


column definition to disk for later retrieval.

5. Filter the File for Invalid Text: Search the marked columns and
rows for any invalid text. Text may be excluded or replaced within
this interactive operation.

6. Perform the Import: Select the Apply button. The application


windows will close and the focus will return to the calling
spreadsheet.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-21


Chapter 5: System Overview

ASCII File Export from the Parameter Table Editor


Export writes either ASCII or EBCDIC formatted files with fixed
columnar data from a spreadsheet editor.

When the application is initialized, the main ASCII File Export window
will appear. After a file and format has been selected, then the ASCII
text is displayed and the Apply button is activated. The steps involved
in performing a file export are as follows:

1. Select File: Select a file for export within the File Export Selection
dialog.

2. Select Format: Select a previous format or create a new format.

3. Review or Edit Column Definitions: Review the previously defined


columns in an existing format by selecting all the columns. Review
the highlighted regions in the file display for accuracy. Columns
can either be edited by hand entering Start Col. and End Col.
values, or by performing click and drag column definition.

4. Save the Column Definition: Save any changes to the current


column definition to disk for later retrieval.

5. Perform the Export: Select the Apply button.

6. Cancel the Export Operation: Press the Cancel button to close the
export windows and return to the calling spreadsheet.

5-22 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 5: System Overview

Disk Datasets

ProMAX uses a proprietary disk dataset format that is tailored for


interactive processing and random disk access. Disk dataset files can
span multiple filesystems, allowing for unlimited filesize datasets.

A typical set of files might look like this:

/ProMAX/data/usertutorials/landexample/12345678CIND
/ProMAX/data/usertutorials/landexample/12345678CMAP
/ProMAX/data/usertutorials/landexample/12345678/TRC1
/ProMAX/data/usertutorials/landexample/12345678/HDR1

These files are described in more detail in the table below.

Table 4: Composition of a Seismic Dataset


File Name Contents
Trace File containing actual sample values for data trace.
(...TRCx)

Trace Header File containing trace header entries corresponding to data


(....HDRx) samples for traces in the trace file. This file may vary in
length, growing as new header entries are added. Keep trace
headers in a separate file so trace headers can be sorted
without needing to skip past the seismic data samples.

Map File keeps track of trace locations, even if data flows over
(....CMAP) many disks. Given a particular trace number, it will find the
sequential trace number within the dataset. This rapidly
accesses traces during processing. The map file is a separate
file, as it may grow during processing, it is always held in the
line directory.

Index File has free-form format information relating to the entire


(....CIND) dataset, including sample interval, number of samples per
trace, processing history, and names of trace header entries.
This file may grow during processing, and it is also always
held in the line directory.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-23


Chapter 5: System Overview

CIND HDRx

CMAP TRCx

Disk Dataset Components - Relative Sizes

Secondary Storage
In a default ProMAX configuration, all seismic dataset files reside on a
single disk partition. The location of this disk partition is set in the
$PROMAX_HOME/etc/config_file with the entry:

primary disk storage partition: /ProMAX/promax/data 200

In addition to the actual trace data files, the primary storage partition
will always contain your flow subdirectories, parameter tables, ordered
parameter files, and various miscellaneous files. The ...CIND and
...CMAP files which comprise an integral part of any seismic dataset are
always written to primary storage.

Since the primary storage file system is of finite size, ProMAX provides
the capability to have some of the disk datasets, such as the ...TRCx and
...HDRx files, and some of the ordered parameter files span multiple
disk partitions. Disk partitions other than the primary disk storage
partition are referred to as secondary storage.

All secondary storage disk partitions must be declared in the appropriate


$PROMAX_HOME/etc/config_file. Samples entries are:

5-24 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 5: System Overview

secondary disk storage partition: /ProMAX/promax/data2 20 TRC OPF


secondary disk storage partition: /ProMAX/promax/data3 20 TRC
secondary disk storage partition: /ProMAX/promax/data4 20 OPF
secondary disk storage partition: /ProMAX/promax/data5 20

Primary Secondary Secondary Secondary Secondary

Data Data2 Data3 Data4 Data5

Refer to the ProMAX System Administration guide for a complete


description of the config_file entries for primary and secondary disk
storage. 20 is the default disk file size in Megabytes. This default is
probably too small for modern surveys as it was based on the old Unix
2Gig file system limitation. A better value would be 4000, or as large as
your dataset, or as large as a file as your system will allow.

WARNING:

If the Primary file system fills up ProMAX will crash and will not be able to launch
until space on Primary has been cleaned up.

Under the default configuration, the initial TRC1 and HDR1 files are
written to the primary storage partition. It is possible to override this
behavior by setting the appropriate parameter in Disk Data Output. If the
parameter Skip primary disk partition? is set to Yes, then no TRC or
HDR files will be written to the primary disk partition. This can be
useful as a means of maintaining space on the primary storage partition.
(To make this the default situation for all users, have your ProMAX
system administrator edit the diskwrite.menu file, setting the value for
Alstore to t instead of nil).

Secondary storage is used in a as listed and available fashion. As an


attempt to minimize data loss due to disk hardware failure, ProMAX
tries to write a dataset to as few physical disks as possible. If the primary
storage partition is skipped by setting the appropriate parameter in Disk
Data Output, the CIND and CMAP files are still written to the primary
storage partition, but the TRCx or HDRx files will not be found there.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-25


Chapter 5: System Overview

Tape Datasets

Tape datasets are stored in a proprietary format, similar to the disk


dataset format, but incorporating required structures for tape input and
output. Tape input/output operates either in conjunction with a tape
catalog system, or without reference to the tape catalog. The tape
devices used for the Tape Data Input, Tape Data Insert, and Tape Data
Output processes are declared in the ProMAX device configuration
window. This allows access to tape drives anywhere on a network. The
machines that the tape drives are attached to do not need to be licensed
for ProMAX, but the fclient.exe program must be installed.

Tape Trace Datasets


A ProMAX tape dataset is similar to a disk dataset in that the index file
(...CIND) and map file (...CMAP) still reside on disk in the Line/survey
database. Refer to the documentation in the Disk Datasets portion of this
helpfile for a discussion of these files. Having the index and map files
available on disk provides you with immediate access to information
about the dataset, without needing to access any tapes. It also provides
all the information necessary to access traces in a non-sequential
manner.

Although the index and map files still reside on disk, copies of them are
also placed on tape(s), so that the tape(s) can serve as a self-contained
unit(s). If the index and map files are removed from disk, or never
existed, as in the case where a dataset is shipped to another site, the tapes
can be read without them. However, access to datasets through the index
and map files residing solely on tape must be purely sequential.

Tape datasets are written by the Tape Data Output process, and can be
read using the Tape Data Input or Tape Data Insert processes. These
input processes include the capability to input tapes by reel, ensemble
number, or trace number. Refer to the relevant helpfile for a complete
description of the parameters used in these processes.

The use or non-use of the tape catalog in conjunction with the tape I/O
processes is determined by the tape catalog type entry in the appropriate
$PROMAX_HOME/etc/config_file. Setting this variable to full
activates catalog access, while an entry of none deactivates catalog
access. An entry of external is used to indicate that an external tape
catalog, such as the Cray Reel Librarian, will be used. You can override
the setting provided in the config_file by setting the environment

5-26 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 5: System Overview

variable for BYPASS_CATALOG to t, in which case the catalog will


not be used. The actual tape devices to use for tape I/O must also appear
as entries in the config_file, under the tape device: stanza.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-27


Chapter 5: System Overview

Tape Catalog System

Tape Catalog Overview


The fundamental strategy of the tape catalog is that a group of tapes are
introduced or logged into the tape catalog, which then works in
conjunction with the Tape Input, Tape Insert, and Tape Output
processes to provide access to those tapes from within the ProMAX
system. Before being introduced to the catalog, an ANSI label is written
to each tape using the catalog utilities outlined below. The catalog
system knows the label and status (initially SCRATCH) of every tape,
and can monitor and validate the tape catalog resources accordingly. For
example, when a request for an output dataset is made, the catalog can
decide which tape to use, and can verify that the correct tape is mounted.
When a dataset overflows a tape, the catalog can decide which tape to
use next, and can again verify that the correct tape is mounted. When a
request for an input dataset is made, the catalog knows which tapes
belong to the dataset, and can verify that the correct tapes are mounted
in the correct order.

Getting Started
The first step in using the ProMAX tape catalog is to create some labeled
tapes.

The program $PROMAX_HOME/sys/bin/tcat is used for tape labelling,


catalog creation and maintenance, and for listing current catalog
information. The program is run from the UNIX command line.

The following steps are required to successfully access the tape catalog:

1. Label tapes.

2. Read and Display tape labels.

3. Add labeled tapes to a totally new catalog.

Before adding the tapes to a new catalog, it is a good idea to visually


inspect the contents of the label information file for duplicate or missing
entries. The contents typically look like:

0 AAAAAA 0 1 4
1 AAAAAB 0 1 4

5-28 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 5: System Overview

2 AAAAAC 0 1 4
3 AAAAAD 0 1 4
4 AAAAAE 0 1 4

The fields are: volume serial number (digital form), volume serial
number (character form), tape rack slot number, site number, and media
type, respectively. You can manually edit these fields.

4. Write a label information file from the existing catalog.

5. Add labeled tapes (and datasets) to the existing catalog.

6. Merge an additional catalog into the existing catalog.

7. Delete a dataset from the catalog.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-29


Chapter 5: System Overview

Chapter Summary

Upon completion of this chapter you should be able to answer the


following questions:

Where is the Seismic Data stored

Are the Trace Headers stored separate from the Data

Where are the Ordered Parameter Files stored

Where are the Parameter Tables stored

Can you build a ProMAX start-up Script

Can you personalize/change a default Menu

Can you explain how data passes through: single trace tools,
ensemble tools, interprocess communication and stand-alone tools

5-30 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 6
Parameter Selection and Analysis
ProMAX 2D contains a suite of processes, providing you with convenient, yet flexible parameter
testing and data analysis capabilities. The processes are found in the process list category called
Flow Control. Parameter testing is broken down by type: manual and automatic. Manual
parameter testing refers to the use of IF-ELSEIF-ENDIF conditional processing sequences to
define a particular test scenario. Using this method you can test multiple parameters in multiple
processes. With the automatic parameter testing, you can easily test one parameter in a single
process.

Data analysis tools and the resulting filtering processes, such as F-K analysis and filtering, are
good examples for parameter testing. In this chapter, one of the exercises is to design filters in the
F-K domain and compare the F-K filtered data to your input seismic data.

Topics covered in this chapter:

Parameter Table Picking


Parameter Test
IF/ENDIF Conditional Processing
F-K Analysis and Filtering
F-K Filtering Comparisons
Interactive Spectral Analysis (ISA)

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 6-1


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

Chapter Objectives

3. Parameter Selection

This chapter gives the processor a framework of how to define and test
parameters, gates, windows and processing flows. Upon completion of
this chapter you should:

Be proficient at Picking Gates and Windows in Trace Display

Know how to Pick Bad Traces

Understand Automatic Parameter Testing

Be able to design IF/ENDIF conditional processing

Be able to interactively test FK Filters and Spectral Analysis

6-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

Parameter Table Picking

Parameter tables are generated when you interactively define lists or


tables of information within various display tools. These files are stored
in binary format and are intended for use in subsequent flows. The
interactivity of Trace Display allows you to generate these tables.

Pick Parameter Tables


In this exercise you will pick a top mute, deconvolution design gate,
trace kill list, and a trace reversal list.

1. Build the following flow in your Watson Rise Line.

Editing Flow: 3.1-Pick Parameter Tables

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Read data from other lines/surveys?: ---------------------No
Select dataset: ----------------------------Shots-with geometry
Trace read option: -----------------------------------------------Sort
Interactive Data Access?: --------------------------------------Yes
Select primary trace header entry: -----------------------FFID
Select secondary trace header entry: --------------OFFSET
Select tertiary trace header entry: ----------------------NONE
Sort order for dataset: ------------------------------------------*:*/
Automatic Gain Control
AGC operator length: -----------------------------------------1000
Trace Display
Number of ENSEMBLES (line segments)/screen: -------2
Do you want to use variable trace spacing?: ----------Yes

2. In Disk Data Input, select Shots-with geometry. Sort the data by


FFID and OFFSET.

3. Replace the AGC operator length default value with 1000.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 6-3


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

4. In Trace Display, use variable trace spacing. This will use the
secondary sort key of OFFSET to variably space the traces. Also,
set the number of ensembles per screen to 2.

5. Execute the flow.


Trace to be killed Mute Traces to be reversed

Decon
Gate

Parameter tables

6. If you did not save your trace kill table from chapter 4, go ahead
and pick the bad traces here: Picking Kill traces... Kill
list from Trace Display.

7. Pick a top mute to get rid of first break and refracted energy:
Picking Pick Top Mute... FB Mute by AOFFSET. Use the
Paintbrush icon to see the effects of your current picks. In this case
you should see only hyperbolas after Paintbrush applies the top
mute.

6-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

8. Pick a deconvolution gate on the first shot: Picking Pick


Miscellaneous Time Gates... decon gate by AOFFSET.
Remember to use MB3 New Layer to pick the bottom of the decon
gate.

9. After projecting your windows use Interactive Data Access to move


through all the shots and QC the windows.

10. If you desire you can pick the reverse traces: Picking Reverse
traces... reverse traces by AOFFSET. In general the
reverse traces will be flagged in the field by the observers log. The
statics routines will also detect the reverse traces for you.

11. Select File Save Picks, then select File Exit/Stop Flow.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 6-5


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

Parameter Test

The Parameter Test process provides a mechanism for automatically


testing simple numeric parameters by creating multiple copies of input
traces and replacing a key parameter in the process to be tested with
specified test values. The output consists of copies of the input data with
a different test value applied to each copy.

Parameter Test creates two header words. The first is called REPEAT
data copy number and is used to distinguish each of the identical copies
of input data. The second is called PARMTEST and is an ASCII string,
uniquely interpreted by the Screen Display processes as a label for the
traces.

Test True Amplitude Recovery with Parameter Test


In this exercise, you will use Parameter Test to compare True Amplitude
Recovery on shot gathers with different values for dB/sec.

6-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

1. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: 3.2-Parameter Test

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: ---------------------------Shots- with geometry
Trace read option: ---------------------------------------------SORT
Interactive Data Access?: ---------------------------------------No
Select primary trace header entry: -------------------------SIN
Sort order list for dataset: -------------------------------------16/
Trace Kill/Reverse
Trace editing MODE: ---------------------------------------------Kill
Get edits from the DATABASE?: ----------------------------Yes
SELECT trace Kill parameter file: --------------------------------
----------------------Kill list from DBTools interactive
Trace Kill/Reverse
Trace editing MODE: --------------------------------------Reverse
Get edits from the DATABASE?: -----------------------------No
Trace selection MODE: --------------------------------EXCLUDE
PRIMARY edit list header word: ----------------------------SIN
SECONDARY edit list header word: ------------SRF_SLOC
TERTIARY edit list header word: -----------------------NONE
SPECIFY trace to be edited: ------------------------1-17:469/
Trace Muting
Re-apply previous mutes: ---------------------------------------No
Mute time reference: ----------------------------------------Time 0
TYPE of mute: ------------------------------------------------------Top
Starting ramp: ------------------------------------------------------30.
EXTRAPOLATE mute times?: ---------------------------------Yes
Get mute file from the DATABASE?: -----------------------Yes
SELECT mute parameter file: -------------------------FB Mute
Parameter Test
True Amplitude Recovery
Trace Display

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 6-7


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

Editing Flow: 3.2-Parameter Test

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Trace Kill/Reverse
Trace Kill/Reverse
Trace Muting
Parameter Test
Enter Parameter VALUES: ------------------------------ 12|9|6
Trace grouping to reproduce: ----------------------Ensembles
True Amplitude Recovery
Apply spherical divergence corrections?: ----------------Yes
Basis for spherical spreading: ---------------1/dist
Apply inelastic attenuation corrections?: -----------------No
Get TAR velocity function from database?: ---No
Should the velocity be treated as space variable: -----No
Specify TAR velocity function: -------------------------
--- 0-7000,850-9000,1300-12000, 2000-15000
Apply dB/sec corrections?: ----------------------------------Yes
dB/sec correction constant: ------------------99999
Apply time raised to a power corrections?: --------------No
APPLY function to data or REMOVE effect of
amplitude corrections?: -------------------------------------Apply
Maximum application TIME: -------------------------------5000
Trace Display
Number of ENSEMBLES(line segments)/screen: --------2
Trace scaling option: ------------------------------Entire Screen
Number of display panels: ---------------------------------------2

2. In Disk Data Input, select Shots-with geometry. Choose to sort


data by SIN, and read the shot number 16. Parameter Test will not
work with Interactive Data Access, so set this to No.

3. In the first Trace Kill/Reverse, select you trace kill file.

4. In the second Trace Kill/Reverse, choose to reverse SRF_SLOC


469 for SINs 1-17.

5. In Trace Muting, select your top mute file.

6-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

6. Specify values for Parameter Test.

Enter a list of parameter values for dB/sec correction constant, each


separated by a vertical bar (|). To determine the format (real, integer,
sequence) and a realistic range of test values, look at the default
value in the True Amplitude Recovery process. (Use values of 12, 9,
and 6 dB/sec for this exercise.)

7. Specify True Amplitude Recovery parameters.

Select Yes to apply spherical divergence, and enter the following


velocity time pairs (0-7000, 850-9000, 1300-12000, 2000-15000).
Select Yes for Apply dB/sec Correction, and enter five nines (99999)
for the dB/sec correction constant.

NOTE:

Entering five nines (99999) is a flag that tells the process to use the values
found in Parameter Test for this parameter.

8. In Trace Display, choose to display 2 ensembles/screen, 2 display


panels, and change the trace scaling from individual to entire
screen. This will display the original shot plus the three parameter
tests on a single screen.

9. Execute the flow to compare displays.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 6-9


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

Viewing Parameter Tests

After viewing the tests and deciding on the most appropriate value
for the dB/sec correction, select File Exit/Stop Flow.

6-10 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

10. Select View from the flow builder menu and look at the processes
that were actually executed in your flow.

Near the bottom of the job.output file is a listing of the


executed processes. There are some additional processes listed here,
that were not in your original flow. Also notice that Parameter Test
is absent. This occurs because Parameter Test is a macro, built from
other processes. If you have problems with a ProMAX flow that you
cannot solve simply email the job.output file to
support@advance.com and they will help out in anyway
they can.

11. Edit you flow again, and change the following Trace Display
parameters:

Editing Flow: 3.2-Parameter Test

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Trace Kill/Reverse
Trace Kill/Reverse
Trace Muting
Parameter Test
True Amplitude Recovery
Trace Display
Number of ENSEMBLES(line segments)/screen: --------1
Automatically SAVE screens: --------------------------------yes
Trace scaling option: ------------------------------Entire Screen
Number of display panels: ---------------------------------------1

12. Execute the flow.

13. Use the Next ensemble icon to display the four tests, then use the
Animation tool to review the tests. Check to see if you would still
use the same value for dB/sec as you chose before.

14. Select File Exit/Stop Flow when finished.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 6-11


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

IF/ENDIF Conditional Processing

Automatic parameter testing is not always an option. It can only be used


when the testing parameter is a simple numeric value, such as the
automatic gain control operator length, or a sequence of numerics, as in
the case of corner frequencies used to define a bandpass filter. When
your testing requires evaluating multi-level tests, or comparing non-
numeric parameters, such as a fan filter option instead of a polygon filter
option in FK Filter, then manual testing must be used.

In order to manually test parameters you must:

Generate multiple copies of the data.

Branch your processing stream so that each copy of the data may be
processed with different parameters.

One method of generating multiple data copies is to use the Reproduce


Traces process. This is actually the same process, designed into
Parameter Test macro.

Reproduce Traces generates a specified total number of copies and


appends a header word to each trace, allowing you to distinguish
between the multiple versions of data. This header word is known as
Repeated Data Copy Number or REPEAT for short. It is a numeric value
from 1-N, where N is the total number of generated copies. You should
place Reproduce Traces after any processing which is common to all
copies of the data, but prior to the processes you wish to compare.

Branching the flow is a conceptual term for controlling the processes


your dataset utilizes. In other words, you do not actually break up any
single flow into separate flows, rather utilize the capability of the IF,
ELSEIF, and ENDIF processes to select and direct traces for processing.
This is handled automatically by the Parameter Test process, as you saw
if you looked at the View information when you executed the previous
flow.

More specifically, each copy of the data is passed to a different process,


or the same process with different parameter selection using a series of
IF, ELSEIF and ELSE processes in the flow. For example, if the data
copy number (REPEAT) is 1, then pass that copy of the data to the next
process. If the data copy number is 2, pass that copy to a different
process, and so on until all copies of the data have been passed to unique
processes. The series of conditions is ended with ENDIF.

6-12 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

Finally, you may use a process called Trace Display Label to generate a
header word for posting a label on the display.

Compare Data With and Without Deconvolution


Incorporate Reproduce Traces with IF and ENDIF to compare
processed and unprocessed data. In this exercise you will compare
unfiltered shot gathers with deconvolution, and filtered shot gathers
with deconvolution. It is always a good idea to have a control copy, the
original input, for further comparison. This flow illustrates how to
compare these three copies.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 6-13


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

1. Copy your previous flow and edit it to look like the following:

Editing Flow: 3.3-IF/ELSEIF Loop

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Trace Kill/Reverse
Trace Kill/Reverse
Trace Muting
True Amplitude Recovery
dB/sec correction constant: ------------------------------------- 9
Reproduce Traces
Trace grouping to reproduce: ----------------------Ensembles
Total Number of datasets: ----------------------------------------3
IF
Trace selection MODE: ------------------------------------Include
SELECT Primary trace header word: --------------REPEAT
SELECT secondary trace header word: --------------NONE
SPECIFY trace list: ---------------------------------------------------1
Trace Display Label
Trace label: ------------------------------------------Original Input
ELSEIF
Trace selection MODE: ------------------------------------Include
SELECT Primary trace header word: --------------REPEAT
SELECT secondary trace header word: --------------NONE
SPECIFY trace list: ---------------------------------------------------2
Spiking/Predictive Decon
Trace Display Label
ELSE
Spiking/Predictive Decon
Trace Display Label
ENDIF
Trace Display

6-14 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

Editing Flow: 3.3-IF/ELSEIF Loop

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Trace Kill/Reverse
Trace Kill/Reverse
Trace Muting
True Amplitude Recovery
Reproduce Traces
IF
Trace Display Label
ELSEIF
Spiking/Predictive Decon
TYPE of deconvolution: -----------Minimum phase spiking
Decon operator length(s): --------------------------------------160
Operator white noise level(s): -------------------------------0.1
Window rejection factor: ------------------------------------------2.
Time gate reference: ----------------------------------------Time 0
Get decon gates from the DATABASE?: ------------------Yes
SELECT decon gate parameter file: -------------decon gate
Output traces or filters: ---------------Normal decon output
Apply a bandpass filter after decon? ----------------------No
Re-apply trace mute after decon?: -------------------------Yes
Trace Display Label
Trace label: ------------------------------------------------------Decon
ELSE
Spiking/Predictive Decon
Apply a bandpass filter after decon?:---------------------Yes
Bandpass filter frequency values: --------------6-12-60-70
----For remaining parameters, use those listed above----
Trace Display Label
Trace label: ---------------------------------------Decon with filter
ENDIF
Trace Display
Number of ENSEMBLES (line segments)/screen: -------3
Number of display panels: ---------------------------------------1
Trace Scaling Option: ----------------------------------Individual

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 6-15


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

2. Use the same parameters as the previous flow for the first four
processes.

3. In True Amplitude Recovery, set the db/sec to the value you chose
in the previous flow.

4. In Reproduce Traces, enter 3 for the total number of datasets.

You will generate two additional copies (3 total), one ensemble at a


time.

5. Select Repeat for Select Primary trace header word in IF and


ELSEIF.

IF acts as the gate keeper, providing the mechanism for selecting or


restricting traces which will be passed into a particular branch of the
flow. Header words are used (just as in Disk Data Input) to uniquely
identify the traces to include or exclude in a particular branch.

In the first IF conditional, select REPEAT as the primary trace


header and 1 (copy number) as the trace list entry. Data copy 1 is
passed to Trace Display Label in this example.This will be the
control copy. The ELSEIF condition passes the second data copy
number (REPEAT=2) to Spiking /Predictive Decon.

The ELSE process selects all traces, not previously selected with IF
or ELSEIF. In our case, having selected two of the three copies of
data for filtering, leaves only the third data copy (REPEAT=3) for
the ELSE branch. In this example, you will apply deconvolution and
filter.

6. Use Trace Display Label to create labels for each copy.

Label the copies according to their unique processing. For example,


label the first copy with Original Input, the second with
Decon, and the final copy with Decon with filter.

7. In Trace Display, choose to display all 3 copies on one screen.

8. Execute the flow.

After viewing the data in this mode, you may choose to display each
copy on a different screen, and use the screen swap mode.

6-16 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

F-K Analysis and Filtering

Separating trace data into signal and noise is often possible in F-K space.
This separation can be exploited by defining a filter to reject the noise
or accept the good data. There are ProMAX tools to view data in F-K
space, design filters and subsequently apply filters to enhance your data.

F-K Analysis
In this exercise you will bring in one shot with some slow linear noise.
After inspection in both the time domain and F-K space, design a filter
to reject the noise. You will want to try a polygon filter as well as a fan
filter to attenuate the noise.

NOTE:

This is not a real processing flow, since, you would normally do the FK filter
before the deconvolution. For class purposes we are using the deconvolution
to enhance the ground roll so that we can demonstrate how powerful FK filters
are at attenuating ground roll.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 6-17


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

1. Copy your previous flow, and add/delete processes so that it looks


like the following:

Editing Flow: 3.4-FK Analysis/Filter

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Trace Kill/Reverse - optional
Trace Kill/Reverse - optional
Trace Muting
True Amplitude Recovery - optional
Spiking/Predictive Decon
Automatic Gain Control
>F-K Filter<
F-K Analysis
Panel width in traces: ------------------------------------------120
Starting time for analysis: ---------------------------------------0.
Ending time for analysis: ----------------------------------------0.
Distance between input traces: ------------------------------55.
Starting display configuration: ----------------TX-TK-FX-FK
Position of zero wavenumber in display: --------CENTER
Position of zero frequency in display: --------------------TOP
Plot FK,TK,TX panels in DB or Linear: ----------DBSCALE
Initial TX gain setting (percentile): --------------------------98.
Initial FK maximum gain setting (db): -----------------------0.
Initial FK minimum gain setting (db): ------------------------0.
Percent flat for trace ramping: ------------------------------100.
Percent flat for time ramping: -------------------------------100.
Select mute polygon table: ------------------------------fk mute
Mode of F-K filter operation: ---------------------------REJECT
Percent flat for F-K filter windowing: ----------------------90.
Time length of F-K filter (ms): -------------------------------500.
Spatial extent of F-K filter (traces): --------------------------50

2. For all processes prior to F-K Analysis, use the same parameters as
the previous flow.

6-18 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

3. In F-K Analysis, enter 122 for the panel width to account for the
shot gap in the transform.

4. Set 55 ft. for the distance between traces (do not let this default to
0).

5. Add an output mute polygon table fk mute.

6. Execute the flow.

7. With the default display you will see four panels. View only the
TX, and FK panels by selecting Configuration TX-and-FK.

8. Use the dx/dt icon. You should identify the ground roll energy in
the F-K domain by the velocity you measure in T-X space.

9. You may find it helpful to rotate the color scale using


Controls Edit Colormap.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 6-19


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

10. With the F-K data displayed, select the Picking tool icon to build a
table for interactively picking a reject zone.

3) Desired
Polygon
2) Move
points 1) Rectangle
control points

Picking Mute for FK Filter

11. Pick a polygon to include all the noise to filter. It is best to start with
a square or rectangle and then use MB1 to add new control points
and MB3 to move the control points to customize the shape of the
polygon as illustrated on the previous page.

6-20 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

12. After building the desired polygon, examine the response of the
data to the filter by selecting FilterResponse FilteredOutput.

FK Filtered Output

13. You may also want to view the impulse response of the filter by
selecting FilterResponse ImpulseResponse. To better view the
operator now select Controls TX Display... Clip by
amplitude .008 and then select OK.

14. After using Interactive Data Access option to view other shots,
select File Exit/Stop Flow, and then select Yes to save your
polygon.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 6-21


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

Compare F-K filtered shots using an IF loop


1. Edit your flow to include an IF loop:

Editing Flow: 3.4-FK Analysis/Filter

Add Delete Execute View Exit


Disk Data Input
Interactive Data Access?: ---------------------------------------No
Trace Kill/Reverse - optional
Trace Kill/Reverse - optional
Trace Muting
True Amplitude Recovery - optional
Spiking/Predictive Decon
Automatic Gain Control
Reproduce Traces
IF
F-K Filter
Type of F-K filter: -----------------------------Arbitrary Polygon
Distance between input traces: -------------------------------55
Panel width in traces: ------------------------------------------122
Test the filter impulse response?: ---------------------------No
Percent flat for time ramping: -------------------------------100.
Percent flat for offset ramping: -----------------------------100.
Get polygon mute file from the database: ---------------Yes
Select mute parameter file: ------------------fk mute
Mode of F-K filter operation: ---------------------------REJECT
Percent flat for F-K filter windowing: ----------------------90.
Time length of F-K filter (ms): -------------------------------500.
Spatial extent of F-K filter (traces): --------------------------50
Re-apply T-X trace mute after filter?: ---------------------Yes
Percentage of K-space to keep around K=0: --------------0.
Trace Display Label
Trace label: --------------------------------------------------FK Filter
ELSE
Trace Display Label
ENDIF
Trace Display
Number of ENSEMBLES (line segments)/screen: -------2

6-22 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

2. Use the same parameters as before for the first seven processes,
except turn off the Interactive Data Access.

3. Create two copies of the shot with Reproduce Traces.

4. Use the Repeat option in IF to send one copy of the shot to the F-K
Filter process.

5. Execute the flow, and review the results.

6. Modify the FK filter to use a fan filter instead of the arbitrary


polygon.

7. Execute the flow, and review the results.

8. You may try changing the mode of operation from REJECT to


ACCEPT and re-running. If you see any signal/hyperbolas you
have removed some signal.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 6-23


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

Interactive Spectral Analysis

Interactive Spectral Analysis computes and displays power, phase and


F-X spectra estimates for interactively selected subsets of traces. These
displays can be configured both interactively and from the ProMAX
menu.

There are three modes of data selection:

Simple Selection: Analyzes only the displayed traces. During the


interactive session you may analyze new traces by choosing Next
Data from the Data menu.

Single Subset Selection: Enables you to interactively select a


rectangular subset of the data for spectral displays. The spectral
displays are automatically updated for each new rectangle
selection.

Multiple Subset Selection: Displays at least two windows: a Data


Selection Window and one or more Spectral Analysis windows.
Subsets for Spectral Analysis are chosen from the Data Selection
Window, using the selection tool from the toolbox. A Spectral
Analysis window for the current selection is made by selecting
Spectral Analysis from the Data Analysis menu. By default, the
Spectral Analysis window updates itself for each new selection.
You can freeze the subset in the Spectral Analysis window so that it
does not update with new selections. This allows spectra from
different subsets to be compared.

Spectral Analysis
In this exercise you will run Interactive Spectral Analysis in all three
modes, and then compare the results of running deconvolution on the
data. Deconvolution testing may become very involved in certain
situations. One criterion that you may use to help decide on decon
parameters is to look at amplitude (or power) spectra of the trace data
before and after decon. If the decon has worked properly, you should see
some flattening, or whitening of the spectrum after decon relative
to before. In this exercise we will look at such a comparison on a single
shot record.

6-24 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

1. Build the following flow to run the ISA in its simplest configuration:

Editing Flow: 3.5-Decon Test and ISA

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: -------------------------Shots-with geometry
Trace Read Option: ----------------------------------------------Sort
Interactive Data Access?: ---------------------------------------No
Select primary trace header entry: -------------------------SIN
Select secondary trace header entry: ---------------- NONE
Sort order for dataset: ------------------------------------------16/
Automatic Gain Control
Interactive Spectral Analysis
Data select method: ---------------------------------------- Simple
Display data by traces or ensembles: -------- Ensembles
----Default the remaining parameters----

2. Execute the flow.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 6-25


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

Interactive Spectral Analysis - Simple Mode

3. Change the contents of the display by using the View Visibility


pull down menu, and selecting the individual tiles of interest.

4. Exit from the display using the File Exit and Stop Flow pull
down menu.

5. Edit the parameters of the Interactive Spectral Analysis to execute


the Single Subset mode instead of the Simple mode.

6-26 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

6. Execute the flow again.

Interactive Spectral Analysis - Single Subset Mode

In this mode you can select a Single Subset of the available data for
the purposes of computing the average power and phase specta.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 6-27


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

7. Click on the Select Rectangular Region icon and then draw a box
around an area of interest. The data window and spectral windows
will change configuration to match your data selection.

You can move or redraw this window as many times as you wish.

8. Exit from the display using the File Exit and Stop Flow pull
down menu.

9. Edit the parameters of the Interactive Spectral Analysis to execute


the Multiple Subset mode instead of the Single Subset mode.

Also choose to Freeze the selected subsets.

6-28 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

10. Execute the flow again.

11. Click on the Select Rectangular Region icon and draw a box
around an area of interest and then select the
Options Spectral Analysis pull down menu.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 6-29


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

12. If you select a new area and repeat the


Options Spectral Analysis pull down selection, a new window
will appear. In this way you can compare the spectral results for
different areas.

13. Select File Exit and Stop Flow.

14. Copy your flow to compare a shot before and after deconvolution
with an IF-ELSEIF loop.

Editing Flow: 3.6-Decon QC with ISA

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Automatic Gain Control
Reproduce Traces
Trace grouping to reproduce: --------------------- Ensembles
Total number of datasets: ----------------------------------------2
IF
SELECT Primary trace header word: ------------- REPEAT
SPECIFY trace list: ---------------------------------------------------1
ELSEIF
SELECT Primary trace header word: ------------- REPEAT
SPECIFY trace list: ---------------------------------------------------2
Trace Muting
Select mute parameter file: --------------------------FB Mute
Spiking/Predictive Decon
Decon operator length(s):---------------------------------------160
Select decon gate parameter file: -------------decon gate
ENDIF
Interactive Spectral Analysis
Data select method: --------------------------Multiple Subsets
Freeze the selected subset?: ---------------------------------Yes
Display data by traces or ensembles: -------- Ensembles

15. After the display comes up you can select the


Options Spectral Analysis pull down menu to show the spectral
estimate for the data before decon.

6-30 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

16. You can use the Slope icon to calculate the dB roll on/off of the
amplitude spectrum.

17. Click on the Next ensemble icon to display the data after decon.

18. Select the Options Spectral Analysis pull down menu again to
show the spectral estimate for the data after decon. Observe the
flattened amplitude spectrum and the change in the dB scale.

Do you believe the amplitudes above 80 Hz?

19. When done File Exit and Stop Flow from each of the display
windows.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 6-31


Chapter 6: Parameter Selection and Analysis

Chapter Summary

Upon completion of this chapter you should be able to answer the


following questions:

Can you Pick Gates and Windows in Trace Display

How do you Pick Bad Traces

Do you understand Automatic Parameter Testing

Can you design an IF/ENDIF conditional processing tree

Can you interactively test FK Filters and Spectral Analysis

6-32 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 7
Elevation Static Corrections
Datum static corrections are generally required for land data to compensate for adverse travel-
time effects of topography and variations in weathering thickness and velocity.

ProMAX offers three methods of applying datum-static corrections, depending on whether or not
the sources are on the surface. All of these options are within the Datum Statics Calculation and
the Datum Statics Apply processes, which actually calculate and apply the static corrections. This
process utilizes a database_math file to create and manipulate related database entries. (This file
can be found in the $PROMAX_HOME/port/misc directory.) These database values are then used
to create trace header entries and apply appropriate static shifts to traces.

You can also use refraction statics to calculate and apply datum statics. Refraction statics will be
covered in a later chapter.

Topics covered in this chapter:

Elevation Statics Discussion


Calculate Elevation Statics
Apply Elevation Statics
Apply User Statics

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 7-1


Chapter 7: Elevation Static Corrections

Chapter Objectives

4a. Elevation Statics

This chapter explains how to calculate and apply elevation statics. Upon
completion of this chapter you should:

Understand the concept of Elevation Statics

Know how to choose a proper Processing Datum

Be able to Calculate and Apply Elevation Statics

Be able to Import and Apply User Statics

7-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 7: Elevation Static Corrections

Elevation Statics

All statics computations are performed in the database. Datum Statics


Calculation* calculates the elevation (datum) static corrections. Datum
Statics Apply applies the static corrections to input data.

Datum Statics Calculation* performs the following functions:

Compute static time shifts to take the seismic data from their
original recorded times, to a time reference as if the data were
recorded on a final datum F_DATUM (usually flat) using a
replacement velocity (usually constant).

Compute N_DATUM (a smooth surface used as the processing


datum).

Partition the total statics into two parts, the Pre (before) NMO term
and Post (after) NMO terms relative to N_DATUM.

Datum Statics Apply performs the following function:

Apply the Pre (before) NMO portion of the statics and write the
remainder to the trace header.

In Datum Statics Calculation* you have the option to shift prestack data
to a floating datum or a final datum. You supply a final datum elevation
and a replacement velocity. The elev_stat_math file then establishes
values in the database for F_DATUM, N_DATUM, S_STATIC,
R_STATIC, and C_STATIC. Details of this process can best be
understood by examining the contents of the elev_stat_math file. This
file typically resides in $PROMAX_HOME/port/misc.

Datum Statics Calculation* then creates four new header entries for
statics: NMO_STAT, FNL_STAT, TOT_STAT and NA_STAT. The
integer multiple of the sample period (usually a multiple of 2 or 4 ms)
portion of NMO_STAT is automatically applied by Datum Statics
Apply, shifting traces to the floating datum. The fractional sample
period portion is written to the NA_STAT header entry and applied
later. Normally the NA_STAT is applied during NMO, which will
interpolate the data to the fractional static properly.

If you select to process to a final datum, C_STATIC is set to zero. Recall


that NMO_STAT = S_STATIC + R_STATIC + C_STATIC and that
C_STATIC = -1.0*FNL_STAT. NMO_STAT is the static that shifts

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 7-3


Chapter 7: Elevation Static Corrections

traces to the final processing datum, and FNL_STAT is zero because


your data are at the final datum.

Datum Statics Terminology


S.P. CDP

Receiver
N_DATUM
Vweathering NMO_STAT
Surface
Elevation
NMO_STAT
Shot
Vreplacement
Base
Weathering
FNL_STAT
S_STATIC C_STATIC R_STATIC

F_DATUM

Database Attributes:
N_DATUM = floating datum

F_DATUM = final datum

S_STATIC = (F_DATUM - ELEV + DEPTH) / DATUMVEL

R_STATIC = [(F_DATUM - ELEV + DEPTH) / DATUMVEL] - UPHOLE

C_STATIC = 2 * [(N_DATUM - F_DATUM) / DATUMVEL]

Trace Header Values:


N_DATUM = floating datum
NMO_STAT = S_STATIC + R_STATIC + C_STATIC
FNL_STAT = - C_STATIC
TOT_STAT = cumulative applied statics
NA_STAT = statics less than one sample period which are not-yet-applied

(If TOT_STAT = 21.2 ms, and the sample period is 4 ms,


NA_STAT = 1.2 ms)

7-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 7: Elevation Static Corrections

Calculate Elevation Statics


1. Create the following flow to calculate elevation statics for your data.

Editing Flow: 4a.1-Calculate Datum Statics

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Datum Statics Calculation*


Elevation or Refraction: --------------------------------Elevation
Final datum elevation: -----------------------------------------800
Replacement velocity: -----------------------------------------8000
Database math method:--Shot Holes Using Uphole Info
NMO static method: ------------------------------------Elevations
Length of smoother: -----------------------------------------------51
Processing DATUM: --------------------------------NMO DATUM
Run ID:------------------------------------------------------------------01

2. Enter the final datum, replacement velocity, and length of smoother.

For this dataset, use a final datum elevation of 800 ft. and a
replacement velocity of 8000 ft/sec.

3. Select the Database Math Method - Shot Hole Using Uphole Info.

The Database Math Method determines which *_stat_math file to


utilize. There are 4 choices:

Shot Hole Using Uphole Info: If you want to honor the shot depth
and uphole information, use the elev_stat_math file.

Shot Holes Ignoring Uphole Times: If you do not trust the uphole
information, then you can override the weathering velocities
calculated with uphole times and shot depths and supply your own
weathering velocity. This option will use the noup_stat_math file.

Surface Source: If you have a surface source.

Other: If you have built a new *_stat_math file by modifying one of


the existing *_stat_math files, you can input the path name to the
modified *_stat_math file.

4. Select the NMO static method - Elevations. Use a smoother of 51.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 7-5


Chapter 7: Elevation Static Corrections

The smoother is defined as number of CDPs to smooth over. This


parameter may require some testing to generate the desired
N_DATUM.

5. Select NMO Datum (floating) for Processing datum.

6. Choose a Run ID of 01. This will generate S_STATIC, R_STATIC,


and C_STATIC and copy them to S_STAT01, R_STAT01, and
C_STAT01.

7. Execute the flow.

8. When the job completes exit the flow, and select the Database
menu.

9. From the DBTools window select the SRF tab (order), and then by
double clicking view the following attributes: R_STAT01,
F_DATUM, DATUMVEL, and ELEV (receiver elevation). Notice
the inverted relationship between the static and the elevation.

Select the SIN tab, and view the following attributes: S_STAT01,
and ELEV (elevation of surface at the shot locations).

From the CDP order, view the C_STAT01 attribute.

10. Why are the source and receiver statics opposite signs? Perhaps the
shots are buried beneath the final datum?

7-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 7: Elevation Static Corrections

11. Now from the DBTools window select Database XDB


Database Display.

12. From the XDB display select Database Get.

From the CDP order, view ELEV, and N_DATUM (floating datum).
Notice the effect of the 51 point CDP smoother you applied.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 7-7


Chapter 7: Elevation Static Corrections

Apply Elevation Statics


1. Copy the flow 3.4-FK Analysis/Filter to apply pre-processing, and
elevation statics to your data.

Editing Flow: 4a.2-Apply Datum Statics

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: ----------------------------Shots-with geometry
Trace read option: --------------------------------------------Get All
----Default all other parameters----
Trace Kill/Reverse
Trace Kill/Reverse
Trace Muting
True Amplitude Recovery
F-K Filter
Spiking/Predictive Decon
Datum Statics Apply
Source datum statics database parameter: -----------------
------------------------------SIN GEOMETRY S_STAT01
Receiver datum statics database parameter: ---------------
----------------------------SRF GEOMETRY R_STAT01
CDP datum statics database parameter: ---------------------
----------------------------CDP GEOMETRY C_STAT01
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: ------Shots-decon/elev statics
----Default all other parameters----

Data output from this flow will later be input to velocity analysis.

2. Execute the flow.

3. Once the job finishes view the shots with flow 1.1-View Shots.
Examine the trace headers for NMO_STAT, FNL_STAT,
TOT_STAT, and NA_STAT using the Header icon.

7-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 7: Elevation Static Corrections

Apply User Statics

If shot and receiver statics to a final datum have been calculated outside
of ProMAX, the statics can be incorporated into a processing flow. Use
the ASCII file import option in XDB Database Display to create entries
which may be accessed by Datum Statics Apply. Datum Statics Apply
creates the necessary database entries, and partitions these imported
statics into NMO_STAT and FNL_STAT. The sample period multiple
portion of NMO_STAT is applied to the traces by Datum Statics Apply,
and the remainder is stored in NA_STAT to be applied later. Recall:
NMO_STAT = S_STATIC + R_STATIC + C_STATIC. Therefore
Datum Statics Apply will recalculate NMO_STAT using the
N_DATUM and C_STATIC previously calculated by Datum Statics
Calculation*

When these statics are imported to the SIN and SRF Ordered Database
Files, they must both be of type Geometry and the Attribute names must
be USERSTAT.

Apply External Statics


In this exercise, you will import static data calculated elsewhere, and
then apply it to your trace data.

For this class, no ASCII format statics file is available, therefore, you
will use the XDB Database ASCII Save functionality to output an
ASCII file of shot and receiver statics created in the previous exercise.
You will then import these statics back to the database. This will allow
you to see both the ASCII import and export portions of the database.

Caution:

Apply User Statics is an alternate method for applying datuming type statics. Only
one of the datuming processes should be run on a dataset. Use either Datum Statics
Apply, Apply User Statics, or Apply Refraction Statics, but only one. Refer to
the helpfiles for additional statics related information.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 7-9


Chapter 7: Elevation Static Corrections

1. Place a copy of the statics file in a directory, accessible by ProMAX.

Since no ASCII statics file is available, create one with the


database ASCII save function. To initiate the save procedure,
bring up DBTools with the Database global command in the
flows window, and then select Database XDB Database
Display.

Bring up the attribute selection by Database Get. Display


SRF: R_STATIC. This attribute can now be saved to an ASCII
file. Select ASCII Save from the global commands to get the
following window.

Step 1 - Select User-defined File in the popup window and enter


a full directory path and filename without an extension. (The
extension, .a_db is created by the program.) Select OK.The
defined path, filename, and attribute name appear.

Step 2 - Click on the attribute name, in this case R_STATIC.


Enter your own description or accept the default description and
click on OK to create the ASCII file. Repeat this entire
procedure to save S_STATIC to an ASCII file. You now have
ASCII files that are ready to import in the next part of the
exercise. When finished, select Cancel from the ASCII save
window.

7-10 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 7: Elevation Static Corrections

2. Select ASCII Client from the menu bar.

3. Click on File and enter the full path and filename (including
extension) of the ASCII file. Click OK and the contents of the
ASCII file are displayed. The ASCII/CLIENT path is a generic
ASCII file import functionality.

4. Once the ASCII file is displayed, select the Order (SRF or SIN),
Infotype (GEOMETRY), and Attribute (USERSTAT).

5. Click on Location Index and then define the rows and columns to
import.

The rows and columns containing the values to be imported are


identified one of two ways:

Rows can be painted by holding down MB1 and moving the


mouse over all rows. The included rows will highlighted black.
Columns for Location Index numbers (station numbers) are
painted using MB2 and highlight in red. Columns for Attributes
(statics values in this example) are painted using MB3 and
highlight in blue).

Click on any of the Rows or Columns buttons and you will be


prompted to manually enter starting and ending values.

6. Click on Display.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 7-11


Chapter 7: Elevation Static Corrections

You will be prompted for an attribute description. Enter your


description of the USERSTAT attribute R_STATIC USER and
select OK. This displays the data you defined on import.

7. Save the new attribute in the database.

Click Cancel in the Client ASCII Import window, then select


Database Save from the main menu bar. Click on USERSTAT in
the On-Screen Attributes to save window. Wait a moment and click
OK in the acknowledgment window. Your USERSTAT values are
now saved in the Database.

Be sure you complete the ASCII Import steps for both shot and
receiver ASCII files.

8. Copy flow 4a.2-Apply Datum Statics. Replace the static values in


Datum Statics Apply with the user statics.

Editing Flow: 4a.3-Apply User Statics

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Trace Kill/Reverse
Trace Kill/Reverse
Trace Muting
True Amplitude Recovery
F-K Filter
Spiking/Predictive Decon
Datum Statics Apply
Source datum statics database parameter: -----------------
----------------------------SIN GEOMETRY USERSTAT
Receiver datum statics database parameter: ---------------
----------------------------SRF GEOMETRY USERSTAT
CDP datum statics database parameter: ---------------------
-----------------------------CDP GEOMETRY C_STATIC
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: -----Shots-decon/user statics

7-12 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 7: Elevation Static Corrections

9. Datum Statics Apply will know to use the user_stat_math file for
the Database Math Method.

The user_stat_math file generates S_STATIC and R_STATIC by


copying the SRF and SIN USERSTAT values that were imported to
the database. These are partitioned into the database parameter
C_STATIC and into the trace header value FNL_STAT.

10. Execute the flow. The trace headers are updated and the are traces
shifted to the floating datum.

11. Once the job finishes view the shots with flow 1.1-View Shots.
Examine the trace headers for NMO_STAT, FNL_STAT,
TOT_STAT, and NA_STAT using the Header icon.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 7-13


Chapter 7: Elevation Static Corrections

Chapter Summary

Upon completion of this chapter you should be able to answer the


following questions:

What are Elevation Statics

What is a good smoother for the Processing Datum

How do you Calculate and Apply Elevation Statics

Can you Import and Apply User Statics

7-14 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 8
Brute Stack
In this chapter you will import a velocity field. You will then use this field to apply NMO and
create a stack.

Topics covered in this chapter:

RMS Velocity Field ASCII Import


Brute Stack with Elevation Statics
Display Stack

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 8-1


Chapter 8: Brute Stack

Chapter Objectives

5. Brute Stack

This chapter creates you first QC stack of the data. Upon completion of
this chapter you should:

Understand how to Import Velocities

Understand the NMO and Stack Parameters

8-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 8: Brute Stack

RMS Velocity Field ASCII Import

One critical part of the pre-stack sequence is to apply normal moveout.


You may want to build a stacking (RMS) velocity parameter table from
a pre-existing field. The following exercise allows you to import an
ASCII RMS velocity field to build the parameter table.

1. From the Flows menu select Tables.

2. A list of possible parameter tables will appear.

Use the scrollbar located on the right-hand side of the window to


scroll to the bottom of the list.

3. Select the VEL (RMS (stacking) Velocity) table

This will take you to the RMS velocity table menu.

4. Click on Create. Do not click on Add.

5. Enter the description name for your imported velocity. Use a name
similar to imported from ascii file.

This opens a parameter table editing window in the form of a


spreadsheet.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 8-3


Chapter 8: Brute Stack

6. Click on the File Import pull down menu.

This opens two new windows, an empty viewing window and a File
selection window.

7. Input the absolute path name to the directory where the velocity file
is stored and append a /* to the end of the pathname. Click on
Filter. (/misc_files/2d/*.)

8. Select the file as indicated by your instructor and click on OK.

The ASCII file is opened, and the contents displayed in the Import
viewing window.

8-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 8: Brute Stack

9. Click on Format.

10. Enter a new format definition name Vels Import Format or select
a previously defined format (you probably do not have any yet).

11. Click on OK.

A format window will open.

12. Click on CDP and then drag the mouse over the appropriate
columns on the import file window to define the correct columns
for the CDP value.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 8-5


Chapter 8: Brute Stack

13. Continue to define column numbers for Time and Vel_rms.

14. Click on Apply.

This will open an Apply Import window.

NOTE:

You do not have to select the rows to import since the database will search for valid
CDP numbers with associated velocities.

15. Select Overwrite ALL existing values with new import values
and OK.

8-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 8: Brute Stack

This will load the values into the table:

16. The XCOOR and YCOOR columns are ignored for 2D.

17. Click on File Exit to save the parameter table and exit from the
editor.

18. Check the table for correctness by going back to the list of tables
from the User Interface and select to Edit the table.

19. Click on Edit and then select the table name.

20. Verify that the file has been saved properly.

21. Click on File Abort to exit from the editor.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 8-7


Chapter 8: Brute Stack

CDP/Ensemble Stack

You will now use the CDP/Ensemble Stack process to create a stacked
section of the data with elevation statics.

1. Build the following flow.

Editing Flow: 5.1-Stack

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: ----------------------Shots-decon/elev statics
Trace read option: -----------------------------------------------Sort
Interactive Data Access: -----------------------------------------No
Select primary trace header entry: -----------------------CDP
Sort order for dataset: ---------------------------------------------*/
Trace Display Label
Trace label: ---------------------------------------elevation statics
Normal Moveout Correction
Direction for NMO application: --------------------FORWARD
Stretch mute percentage: --------------------------30.
Apply any remaining static during NMO?: --Yes
Long offset correction?:--------------------------------------NONE
Anisotropy correction parameter eta:------------------------0.
Apply partial NMO?: ----------------------------------------------No
Get velocities from the database?: -------------------------Yes
SELECT Velocity parameter file: ---------------------------------
------------------------------------imported from ascii file
CDP/Ensemble Stack
Sort order of input ensembles: ------------------------------CDP
METHOD for trace summing: ------------------------------Mean
Root power scalar for stack normalization: -------------0.5
Apply final datum statics after stack? -------------------Yes
Has NMO been applied?: --------------------------------------Yes
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: -------------------STK-elev statics

8-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 8: Brute Stack

2. In Disk Data Input, select your shots with elevation statics applied,
and sort by CDP.

3. Add a trace display label.

4. Apply Normal Moveout Correction.

Select the imported velocity file.

5. Stack the data with CDP/Ensemble Stack.

6. Write a new stacked dataset to disk.

7. Execute the flow.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 8-9


Chapter 8: Brute Stack

Display Stack

1. Build the following flow to display your stack.

Editing Flow: 5.2-Display Stack

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: -----------------------------------STK-elev statics
Automatic Gain Control
----Default all parameters----
Bandpass Filter
Ormsby filter frequency values: ------------------ 3-6-50-60
----Default all other parameters----
Trace Display
Primary trace LABELING header entry: --------------NONE
Secondary trace LABELING header entry: ------------CDP

2. Execute the flow.

8-10 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 8: Brute Stack

3. View the stacked dataset.

4. Exit the flow.

5. You may also stack and display the user statics dataset STK-user
statics as a QC.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 8-11


Chapter 8: Brute Stack

Chapter Summary

Upon completion of this chapter you should be able to answer the


following questions:

Can you import Velocities

Do you understand the NMO and Stack Parameters

8-12 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 9
Neural Network First Break
Picking
Artificial neural networks have had excellent results solving pattern recognition problems. First
break picking, trace editing, and reversed trace selection, typically tedious processing steps, are
all pattern recognition problems and lend themselves to the application of neural networks.

For First-break picking and trace editing, ProMAX uses a Cascade-Correlation Learning
Architecture. Advantages of this algorithm include decreased network learning time and the
ability to incrementally add to an existing network. The neural network compares various
attributes of the correct pick to other possible picks within a window. The network recognizes the
ability of an attribute to predict the correct pick and accordingly weights the network connection
to that attribute.

Topics covered in this chapter:

Interactive Neural Network (NN) First Break Training/Picking


Batch Neural Network (NN) First Break Picking

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 9-1


Chapter 9: Neural Network First Break Picking

Chapter Objectives

4b. Refraction Statics Pick First Breaks

This chapter serves as set-up for Chapter 10 Refraction Static


Corrections. Refraction statics are necessary in areas of severe
topography or areas of complex weathering zones. First break picks are
a required input to the refraction statics algorithms. Upon completion of
this chapter you should:

Understand how to Pick First Breaks

Be able to Train the Neural Network

9-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 9: Neural Network First Break Picking

Interactive NN First Break Training/Picking

The first break picker in Trace Display gives you the opportunity to
interactively create and train a neural network to pick first breaks. You
will manually pick some first breaks and use these picks to train a neural
network. The neural network will then try to pick first breaks on selected
shots, and you can QC these picks using Trace Display.

NOTE:

The NN First Break Picker menu in Trace Display only appears if geometry is
defined, and your dataset matches the database. You can check if geometry matches
the database vie MB2 under the Dataset listing from the Flows menu.

Interactive Training
1. Copy your flow 4a.2-Apply Datum Statics and add/delete/edit
processes so that it looks like the following:

Editing Flow: 4b.1-NN First Break Picking

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: ----------------------------Shots-with geometry
Trace read option:------------------------------------------------Sort
Interactive Data Access?: --------------------------------------Yes
Select primary trace header entry: -------------------------SIN
Sort order for dataset: ----------------------------------1,10,20/
Trace Kill/Reverse
----Use the same parameters as before----
Trace Kill/Reverse
----Use the same parameters as before----
True Amplitude Recovery
----Use the same parameters as before----
Trace Display
----Default all parameters for this process----

2. Kill and reverse appropriate traces and apply true amplitude


recovery before picking first breaks. Do not apply Trace Muting.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 9-3


Chapter 9: Neural Network First Break Picking

3. Execute the flow to begin the NN sequence.

Run Trace Display

Train the Neural Network


Trace Display -> FirstBreakPicker ->
Set Neural Network Parameters
Create Training Dataset
Create a new time gate parameter file
Pick or edit a set of good picks to store in FB Training Data
Pick or edit the time gate centered on the FB Training Data
Neural Net Training
Create a new NN weight table (e.g., fb_weight)
or, if continuing Training,
Use the existing NN weight table

Use Neural Network to make FB picks


Trace Display -> FirstBreakPicker ->
Neural Net Recall -> One time Recall
Create a new OPF parameter file (e.g., test nn picks)

Trace Display ->


FirstBreakPicker ->
NO
Purge Neural Net Are the NN picks good?
Delete (MB2) test nn picks
YES

Do you want to continue to YES Go to


next
Train the Neural Network? gather
NO

Use Neural Network to pick every shot

Interactive NN FB picking Batch NN FB picking


Trace Display -> FirstBreakPicker -> Exit Trace Display
Neural Net Recall -> Continuous Recall Run NN First Break Picker
Run Trace Display

QC and Edit the NN FB picks on every shot

9-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 9: Neural Network First Break Picking

4. From the main Trace Display menu bar, select FirstBreakPicker


Set Neural Network Parameters. The following menu will
appear.

Select the pick polarity and the signal/noise gate length. The neural
network works well with peaks and a gate length of 100 ms. Select
OK to accept these parameters. The neural network itself, however,
may key off of instantaneous phase/frequency, amplitude before or
after the first break, or any other pattern it can recognize.

5. From the main menu bar, select FirstBreakPicker Create


Training Data set.

A First Break NN Dataset window appears. Type in a name nn


first break gate for your first break time gate, and select
OK. A second window will appear for selecting a secondary key.
Choose AOFFSET, and then OK. The Picking tool icon appears on
the left side of the display. There will be two entries in the Pick
Layers box: FB Training Data and the nn first break gate.

6. Select the nn first break gate table from the Pick Layers window,
and pick the top of the gate.

It is not necessary to make a pick on every trace, as the gate is


interpolated between picks. The network tries to follow the slope of
the top gate when picking first breaks, so it is necessary that the top
gate closely follows the trend of the first breaks. Usually picking
about 25ms above the first break, at timing line intersection works
quite well. To pick the bottom of the gate click MB3 in the data
window and select New Layer. The gate should contain at least three
peaks, but not be so large as to lengthen execution time. It will be
helpful to Zoom in on the first breaks before picking.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 9-5


Chapter 9: Neural Network First Break Picking

7. Click on FB Training Data in the Pick Layer window and


manually pick the first breaks.

First Break Picks

Top of time gate

Bottom of time gate

Manually pick first breaks using MB1. Pick first breaks on 20-30
traces. Because training is interactive you can incrementally train
the network. This means you do not need many picks to begin
training, as more picks can be added in future training runs. More
picks means longer training time.

Use MB3 to select the Snap to peak option.

9-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 9: Neural Network First Break Picking

8. After picking, select FirstBreakPicker Neural Net Training...

A First Break NN Training window appears, including a list of First


Break Weight Tables. Create a new table weight1 and select
OK. The network will be trained using your picks. While the
network is training, the cursor will change from an arrow to a
wristwatch. When the cursor changes back to an arrow, training is
complete.

9. From the menu bar, select FirstBreakPicker Neural Net Recall


One Time Recall.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 9-7


Chapter 9: Neural Network First Break Picking

The One time Recall option applies the neural network to the
currently displayed gather. A First Break NN Recall window
appears.

You will be prompted to either choose an Ordered Parameter


File(OPF) from the list, or create a new OPF for storing picks.

Create a new OPF called NN training test picks for the


name, enter 1000 for the offset to start picking, and default all other
parameters. Select OK. The Neural Network is applied to the current
gather display. The results of the picking are displayed.

10. If the picks are bad, modify your FB Training Data and retrain the
network.

To modify training picks, click on the Picking tool icon. Your new
table of picks appears in the Pick Layers window. Remove the table
from the list and activate the FB Training Data. Modify or add to
these training picks, select First Break NN Training, and use the
same weight table. Iterate through steps 6, 7, and 8 until you are
satisfied with the results. If you still cannot get satisfactory results,
try purging the Neural Network (FirstBreakPicker
Purge Neural Net) and starting over.

11. Set Neural Net Recall to Continuous and click the Next ensemble
icon to go to the next shot.

9-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 9: Neural Network First Break Picking

You can retrain if necessary, or if you think the picks are close
enough, select File Exit/Stop Flow, and choose to save edits
before exiting.

The weight table, and time gates are saved and can be used in the
batch NN First Break Picker process to pick the entire dataset.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 9-9


Chapter 9: Neural Network First Break Picking

Batch Neural Network First Break Picking

This step uses the neural network weight matrix to pick first breaks on
all shots. In the case of first-break picking, neural network picks are
stored in the ordered database and can be accessed for various uses
including refraction static analysis.

Pick First Breaks for entire survey


In the previous exercise, we interactively created and saved a fb_weight
matrix file, and a time gate. Now we will use these as input to the NN
First Break Picker to pick all shots in batch mode.

1. Alter the existing flow as follows:

Editing Flow: 4b.1-NN First Break Picking

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: ----------------------------Shots-with geometry
Trace read option: --------------------------------------------Get All
----Default all other parameters----
Trace Kill/Reverse
Trace Kill/Reverse
True Amplitude Recovery
>Trace Display<
NN First Break Picker
Select weight matrix parameter file: ----------------weight1
Number or traces in median line fit: --------------------------5
Maximum trace to trace static:---------------------------------20
Starting offset to determine first break pick slope: 1000
Select time gate parameter file: -------nn first break gate
First break storage: ------------------Header and Database
4 digit ID to store pick time in TRC database: ------ 0001

9-10 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 9: Neural Network First Break Picking

2. In Disk Data Input, input your entire dataset.

Some preprocessing may be necessary, such as trace edits, filtering,


scaling. Preprocessing is the same as input to the interactive NN
First Break Pick Training.

3. Select NN First Break Picker parameters.

Data dependent parameter selections are based on testing or


experience. Parameters are consistent with those for the interactive
NN FB Pick Training.

Input the fb_weight matrix weight1 file.

You must specify a starting offset for the picker. Specify an offset
with good S/N and no shingling of refractors. For this data, an offset
value of about 1000 ft. is adequate.

4. Execute the flow.

5. Once the picker is completed, QC your picks.

Edit the same flow, and toggle NN First Break Picker inactive, and
Trace Display active, and execute the flow. From the menu bar in
the Trace Display window, select Picking Edit Database Values
(first breaks)... Select NN_PICK as the Infotype, and PICK0001
(the 12345678 picks are from the interactive picker) from the OPF
File Selector, and use the same name to save edits.

Dont spend too much time editing picks here. The easiest way to
view and edit your picks is to use the first break editing capabilities
of the Refraction Statics process in the next chapter. Also do not
worry about zero picks on the dead traces.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 9-11


Chapter 9: Neural Network First Break Picking

Chapter Summary

Upon completion of this chapter you should be able to answer the


following questions:

Can you Pick First Breaks

Do you know how to train the Neural Network

9-12 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 10
Refraction Static Corrections
This section covers the steps for calculating and applying refraction statics. First break picks are
required as input into this process.

The refraction statics processes expects R_STATIC and S_STATIC to be present in the database.
Once these attributes are in the database the refraction statics processes can fill them in with more
accurate static values than simple elevation static calculations. The recommended method to
create R_STATIC and S_STATIC database entries is to run the process Datum Statics
Calculation*, before running the refraction statics processes.

Topics covered in this chapter:

Refraction Statics
Refraction Statics Calculation - coordinate based
Apply Refraction Statics
Stack with Refraction Statics

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 10-1


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

Chapter Objectives

4b. Refraction Statics Pick First Breaks

This chapter serves as an alternative to Chapter 7 Elevation Statics


Corrections. Refraction statics are necessary in areas of severe
topography or areas of complex weathering zones. Upon completion of
this chapter you should:

Understand the difference between Refraction and Elevation Statics

Be able to Calculate Refraction Statics

Be able to Apply Refraction Statics

10-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

Refraction Statics

ProMAX provides an interactive interface for final editing of first-break


picks, layer assignment, velocity and delay time editing. The final
results of this process are a near-surface depth/velocity model and
travel-time corrections to the final datum written to the database.
Solutions are calculated by three methods: Generalized Reciprocal
Method (GRM), Standard Delay Time (DLT), and Diminishing
Residual Matrices (DRM). Each solution is written to the database,
giving you the option of selecting the most appropriate solution.

NOTE:

First breaks must be picked and written to the database prior to this exercise. Please
refer to the Neural Network First Break Picking exercise earlier in this manual.

Refraction Statics - 2D
In this exercise you will use the Refraction Statics* process and first-
break pick times to calculate a near-surface model and travel-time
corrections.
NOTE:

This process does not use XY values, therefore it is not applicable to crooked lines.
Crooked may be defined as any line with a greater than 15 degree bend. If you are
calculating refraction statics on a crooked line, refer to the Refraction Statics
Calculation* process described later in this chapter.

This process calculates shot and receiver refraction statics to shift to the
final datum and updates the database. Results of this exercise will be
used by Datum Statics Apply in a later exercise.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 10-3


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

1. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: 4b.2-Refraction Statics

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Refraction Statics*
Select display DEVICE: -----------------------------This Screen
Select First Break Times file: -TRC:NN_PICK:PICK0001
Get LAYER Picks from DATABASE: -------------------------No
Get Refractor Velocities from DATABASE: ----------------No
Select TRACE data file: ---------------Shots-with geometry
Compute V0 from UPHOLE data?: -------------------------Yes
Number of layers: ----------------------------------------------------1
Use Delay Times in velocity/depth model?: ------------Yes
Use Deep Hole delay time algorithm?: ---------No
Use GRM in velocity/depth model?: -----------------------Yes
Specify GRM minimum XY distance: -------------0.
Specify GRM maximum XY distance: ------------0.
Specify GRM XY distance increment: ----------55.
Final datum Elevation: -----------------------------------------800
Replacement Velocity: ----------------------------------------8000
Use Uphole Time in source statics algorithm?: ---------No

2. Select Refraction Statics parameters.

Select your first break pick file. Picks are typically in the database in
the TRC order and NN_PICK Infotype. Select the batch PICK0001
file for this exercise. Input trace data will be the raw shots. Enter a
final datum of 800 ft. and a replacement velocity of 8000 ft/sec.

10-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

3. Execute the flow.

A menu appears with a list of options. Follow the normal sequence


from top to bottom using mouse button helps.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 10-5


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

4. Click on Edit Picks.

Use the Edit Picks option for final editing of first-break picks prior
to inversion. Use the mouse button helps to guide your editing; use
the options on the right side of the screen to edit your data. To guide
your editing you may want to turn on the seismic by toggling on Add
Traces. Click MB2 below the data to move to the next set of shots,
or MB3 to move backwards. Select Done to go back to the main
menu. Select Yes to Output Updated Picks to the Database, and
provide a name RefrEdit for the pick file.

Warning:

The editing in this function currently snaps to a sample and not necessarily the true
peak. This could lead to up to a 4ms pick error. Residual statics, however, should
correct for these slight errors.

10-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

5. Click on Define Layers.

This option displays pick times for both sides of the spread, as in the
case of split spread shooting. Define the offset range for each layer
by holding down and dragging MB1 over the corresponding range,
then releasing MB1. This is an interpretive process. Note: The
displayed velocity is only a guide; you are not assigning a velocity
for the layer. Avoid inflection points where refractors are shingling.
Also avoid low S/N areas. The velocity you get should be on the
order of 7500 f/s. Select Done and then Yes to Output Refractor
Picks to Database.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 10-7


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

6. Click on Refractor Velocity.

This option provides for interactive editing of the weathering


velocity and the calculated velocity model for each refractor. The top
display is a graph of velocity vs. station. Editing or smoothing of the
velocity values is done only in the bottom display which is a zoomed
version of the top display. Select a velocity to edit by selecting the
appropriate box in the upper right, such as Edit V1. Refer to mouse
button helps for editing functionality. The plotted points represent
the layer number and are color coded by the calculation method
used. Perhaps there is a problem in V0 resulting from questionable
uphole times? You may want to smooth through V0 or replace it with
a constant 5000 f/s. Select Done when editing is complete, and Yes
to Output Refractor Velocities and V0 to Database.

10-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

7. Click on View Static Solutions.

This option allows interactive editing of the calculated intercept


times for each layer. You will first view/edit Receiver Delay Time
Solutions, then Source Delay Time Solutions. The top display is a
graph of intercept time vs. station. Editing of the intercept values is
done in the bottom display. Refer to mouse button helps for editing
functionality. Select Done when editing is complete. Select Yes to
view either Receiver Delay Time corrected Shot Records or Source
Delay Time corrected Receiver Records, depending on what you
edited. Select Done when finished viewing.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 10-9


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

8. Click on Refractor Depth Model.

This option allows viewing the calculated near-surface depth model,


calculated from the velocity and intercept data. Although there is
editing functionality in this option, if the depth model is not
geologically possible you may want to re-edit first break picks,
velocities or intercept times, and then rerun this step. Notice how the
GRM method falls short where there are no sources for the
reciprocal method to calculate the receiver static. Select Done and
Yes to Output Refractor DEPTHS to Database.

10-10 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

9. Click on Output Statics.

This option allows viewing the shot and receiver statics calculated
from the model data. Source statics from the elevation of the shot
through the model to final datum are displayed with the character
s. Receiver statics from the elevation of the receiver through the
model to final datum are displayed with the character r. Select Yes
to Output STATICS to the DATABASE.

NOTE:

In the main menu, click MB2 on any previous box to view its current values or MB1
to re-edit those values. If you choose to re-edit, be sure to step through all
subsequent options to correctly recalculate your final statics.

10. Select Exit.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 10-11


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

11. Exit the current flow. From the Flows window, access the database
with the Database global command option.

To view the calculated refractor depths and statics solutions simply


double click on the appropriate attribute. You can also go the XDB
Database Display to overlay the static values. The Order is SRF or
SIN, and the Infotype for the total static is Geometry. This is the
value that will be used by the process Datum Statics Apply. In the
Statics Infotype, there are incremental statics that represent the
difference between the total refraction statics, and the original
elevation statics. To the right of the attributes are detailed
descriptions of each.

10-12 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

Coordinate Based Refraction Statics

ProMAX provides a coordinate based refraction statics algorithm that


computes refractor velocities and delay times, a near-surface depth/
velocity model and travel-time corrections to the final datum from
offset and first break information. There is also an option to edit first
break pick files automatically. All of the preceding attributes are
written to the database. Multiple layer models can be created, and
refractor velocities and depths and velocities will be computed for each
layer. There are many advantages to using this technique:

Very robust for noisy first break picks.


Works independent of shooting geometry.
First break picks are not required for every shot.

The main disadvantages are that there is not a graphical interface for
editing. The source and receiver static solutions are applied to the data
in a future step, Apply Refraction Statics.

NOTE:

First break times must be picked and written to the database prior
to this exercise. Please refer to the Neural Network First Break Picking
exercise earlier in this manual.

As a part of this exercise you will see that there are two ways to enter
the refractor offset ranges. These are:

Manually.

By picking a Pick Top Mute in Trace Display.

In this exercise you will use first-break pick times to calculate a near-
surface model and travel-time corrections. This process calculates shot
and receiver refraction statics to shift to the final datum and updates the
database. Results of this exercise will be used by Apply Refraction
Statics in the next exercise.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 10-13


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

1. Edit the current flow as follows:

Editing Flow: 4b.2-Refraction Statics

Add Delete Execute View Exit

>Refraction Statics*<
Refraction Statics Calculation*
Select first break time file: -----TRC:NN_PICK:PICK0001
Number of layers: ----------------------------------------------------1
Identification number: ----------------------------------------------1
Minimum fold: ---------------------------------------------------------1
Shooting Geometry: -----------------------------2D split spread
V0 options: -------------------Compute V0 from uphole data
INPUT REFRACTOR OFFSET?: ----------------------------- Yes
Refractor Offset specification: --------User typein
Enter SIN and refractor offsets: -----------------------
-------------------------------10:-1800--500,500-1800/
COOMPUTE REFRACTOR VELOCITIES?: -------------- Yes
Type of INITIAL velocity computation: ---- MEAN
Smooth INITIAL velocities before output?: ---Yes
Length of INITIAL velocity smoother: ----------201
Edit first break times (median velocity?: ------No
COMPUTE DELAY TIMES?: ----------------------------------- Yes
TYPE of delaytime ALGORITHM: -Gauss-Seidel
Number of iterations: ------------------------------------5
TYPE of delay time computation: ----------- MEAN
Iterate refractor velocity?: -------------------------- No
COMPUTE REFRACTOR DEPTH MODEL?: ------------- Yes
First refractor smoothing: -----------No smoothing
COMPUTE SOURCE and RECEIVER STATICS?: ----- Yes
Final datum Elevation: -----------------------------800
Replacement method: -----------Refractor Velocity
COMPUTE RESIDUAL STATICS:? ----------------------------No

10-14 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

2. Select Refraction Statics Calculation* parameters.

Select the first break time to use for the statics decomposition. These
time picks will be in the TRC OPF and will normally be of the type
NNPICK. Select the PICK0001 file. If you have output an edited
pick file, it will be stored with an infotype of FBPICK. Enter the
number of layers to model, in this case use one layer. The
identification number will be 1 for the first run through the process.
The shooting geometry is 2D split spread.

There are 5 steps to Refraction Statics Calculation* described in


the menu. They may all be turned on for refraction statics
computation or you may select to run one option at a time and view
the output in the database.
3. INPUT V0 and REFRACTOR OFFSET.

In this exercise well compute V0 from uphole times and manually


type in the refractor OFFSET range.

Three database entries are created in the SIN OPF:

SIN REFR_OFF OFFPSS11 ---Near positive offset of refractor.

SIN REFR_OFF OFFPSE11 ---Far positive offset of refractor.

SIN REFR_OFF OFFNGS11 ---Near negative offset of refractor.

SIN REFR_OFF OFFNGE11 ---Far negative offset of refractor.

SIN VELOCITY V0INIT11 ----Weathering Velocity.

These database attributes may be edited. The V0INIT11 is written


over each time you rerun the module. If you want to make a
permanent change, edit the uphole times.

4. COMPUTE REFRACTOR VELOCITIES.

With this subheading turned on a refractor velocity is calculated


based on the first break times and the offset range from the previous
step. Although you can smooth the velocity model in the menu, you
may wish to look at your model in the database before smoothing.
You could then either smooth in the database (Good to see
immediate results of smoothing), or define a smoother in the menu.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 10-15


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

There is also an option to edit the first break picks automatically by


setting a deviation from the median velocity described by the offsets.
If any picks deviate more than the selected amount they will be
killed, and set to NULL in a new first break picks database file TRC
F_B_PICK FBPEDITX, where X is the run identification number.
Only the good picks will be included in this file. Remember to
examine this edited file.

Three database entries are created.

CDP VELOCITY VCINIT11 -- CDP velocity for 1st refractor.

SIN VELOCITY VSINIT11 ----Source velocity for 1st refractor.

TRC F_B_PICK FBPEDIT1 ----Edited first break pick file.

These database attributes may be edited.

5. COMPUTE DELAY TIMES.

Once CDP velocity is available, delay times for shots and receivers
may be computed. This is done by iteration, starting with source
delay time estimates, followed by receiver delay time estimates, and
(optionally) finalized by CDP velocity updating. Values are not
computed for any SIN, SRF or CDP that does not meet the minimum
fold (menu parameter) criterion. Once the decomposition is
complete for each refractor, these missing values are interpolated
based on X and Y.

Three database entries are created.

SIN DELAYTIM SDELAY11----Source Delay times.

SRF DELAYTIM RDELAY11--- Receiver delay times.

CDP VELOCITY VCFIN011---- Final CDP velocities.

10-16 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

6. COMPUTE REFRACTOR DEPTH MODEL.

The depth model stage inputs delay times and refractor velocities in
CDP, interpolates refractor velocity into SIN and SRF, computes a
depth model for sources and another for receivers. Optionally, the
first refractor depth in SRF may be projected into CDP, smoothed,
projected back into SRF, V0 recomputed in SRF based on the
smoothed depths, new V0 projected from SRF to SIN, and finally
SIN and SRF depth models computed.

Six database entries are created.

SIN REFDEPTH SDEP_011---Source Refractor Depth.

SIN VELOCITY VSFIN011 -- Final Source velocity for 1st


refractor.

SIN VELOCITY V0FIN011 ---Final Weathering Velocity.

SRF REFDEPTH RDEP_011--Receiver Refractor Depth.

SRF VELOCITY VRFIN011- - Final Receiver velocity for 1st


refractor.

SRF VELOCITY V0FIN011 ---Final Weathering Velocity.

7. COMPUTE SOURCE AND RECEIVER STATICS.

The statics computation stage inputs refractor velocities and


refractor depths, computes source and receiver depths to the FINAL
datum of 800 feet and outputs static values. We have the choice of
inputting a constant velocity or the bottom refractor velocity. For
this exercise choose a user specified value of 8000 ft/sec.

Two database entries are created.

SRF GEOMETRY RSTAT00X --- Receiver statics.

SIN GEOMETRY SSTAT00X ----Source statics.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 10-17


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

Apply Refraction Statics

The Datum Statics Apply program uses refraction statics computed by


the Refraction Statics* or Refraction Statics Calculation* processes,
along with elevations from the database to compute NMO_STAT and
FNL_STAT. As with the previous methods, these header entries are
updated and the integer multiple of a sample period portion of
NMO_STAT is applied to the trace and the remainder is written to
NA_STAT to be applied later. If the option to process to a final datum
is selected, C_STATIC is set to zero. Recall: NMO_STAT = S_STATIC
+ R_STATIC + C_STATIC. Therefore, C_STATIC is zero,
NMO_STAT becomes the static shifting traces to the final datum, and
FNL_STAT is zero because your data will already be at the final datum.

It is important to note that the Datum Statics Apply process first checks
to see if other statics have been applied to the traces by an earlier
processing step. If statics are applied, Datum Statics Apply first removes
these statics returning the traces to their original recorded time
reference. Also, if previous statics contained any hand statics or shot
delay corrections, these statics are also removed and should be
reapplied.

The refraction statics to be applied must be calculated prior to running


Datum Statics Apply. Datum Statics Apply is generally executed in a
processing flow prior to velocity analysis. This process updates the
statics trace headers and applies the shifts to each trace.

10-18 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

Apply Refraction Statics to your data.


1. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: 4b.3-Apply Refraction Statics

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset:-----------------------Shots-decon/elev statics
Trace Read option:-------------------------------------------Get All
----Default all other parameters----
Datum Statics Apply
Source datum statics database parameter: -----------------
-----------------------------SIN GEOMETRY SSTAT001
Receiver datum statics database parameter: ---------------
----------------------------SRF GEOMETRY RSTAT001
CDP datum statics database parameter: ---------------------
-----------------------------CDP GEOMETRY C_STATIC
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: ------Shots-decon/refr statics
----Default all other parameters----

NOTE:

We do not have to recalculate the datum statics (...C_STATIC...) unless you want to
change the smoother of N_DATUM, the datum elevation, or the replacement
velocity. Datum Statics Apply will back out the elevation statics before it applies
the refraction statics.

2. In Datum Statics Apply, select your Source and Receiver statics.


You have the option of choosing the statics from any of the
refraction statics calculation methods.

For Source statics, the order is SIN and the Infotype is Geometry.
You will have an available list of parameters files, saved in
Refraction Statics*. Select one of the following statics files:

GRM Refraction Statics for Sources to Final datum. The GRM


method is not valid for this line since it is not split spread.

DRM Refraction Statics for Sources to Final datum.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 10-19


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

DLT Refraction Statics to Final datum.

Coordinate based- Source statics to Final datum from coordinate


based method.

For Receiver statics, the order is SRF and the Infotype is Geometry.
Select one of the following statics files:

GRM Refection Statics for Receivers to Final datum. The GRM


method is not valid for this line since it is not split spread.

DRM Refraction Statics for Receivers to Final datum.

DLT Delay Time Refr. Statics-Receivers to Final datum.

Coordinate based- Receiver statics to Final datum from coordinate


based method.

3. Add a new output dataset Shots-decon/refr statics

4. Execute the flow.

Traces are shifted to the floating or final datum, depending on your


selection.

5. Build a flow to display gathers with refraction statics applied and


use the Header icon to check updated statics header entries.

Display gathers with elevation statics applied instead of refraction


statics and check these trace header values on the same trace. Note
the differences due to Datum Statics Apply.

6. Use your previous flow 5.1-Stack to stack the refraction corrected


shots to a dataset STK-refr statics.

10-20 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

Chapter Summary

Upon completion of this chapter you should be able to answer the


following questions:

What is the difference between Refraction and Elevation Statics

How do you Calculate Refraction Statics

When do you Apply Refraction Statics

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 10-21


Chapter 10: Refraction Static Corrections

10-22 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 11
Stack Comparisons
In this chapter you will use Trace Display to compare two stacks.

This flow is used throughout the rest of the class to compare stack sections.

Topics covered in this chapter:

Compare Stacks

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 11-1


Chapter 11: Stack Comparisons

Chapter Objectives

5. Brute Stack

In this chapter you learn a slick way to compare stack datasets. This
technique is quite valuable in testing processing flows and parameters.
Upon completion of this chapter you should:

Be able to graphically compare any two stacks

11-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 11: Stack Comparisons

Compare Stacks

1. Build the following flow to compare stacks:

Editing Flow: 5.3-Compare Stacks

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: -----------------------------------STK-elev statics
----Default all other parameters----
Disk Data Insert
Select dataset: ------------------------------------STK-refr statics
----Default all other parameters----
Automatic Gain Control
----Default all parameters----
Bandpass Filter
Ormsby filter frequency values: ------------------ 3-6-50-60
----Default all other parameters----
Trace Display
Primary trace LABELING header entry: --------------NONE
Secondary trace LABELING header entry: ------------CDP
----Default all other parameters----

2. Execute the flow.

The stack with elevation statics will appear first. Use the Next
ensemble icon to display the stack with refraction statics. After both
stacks have been displayed, use the animation tool to compare the
stacks.

You may want to execute this flow again, and display both stacks on
a single screen.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 11-3


Chapter 11: Stack Comparisons

Chapter Summary

Upon completion of this chapter you should be able to answer the


following question:

How do you graphically compare two stacks

11-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 12
Velocity Analysis and the Volume
Viewer
Velocity Analysis provides comprehensive interactive velocity analysis, velocity quality control,
and velocity field modification capabilities.

Precomputing data at predefined locations is also supported to speed the interactive session. When
used in the precomputed mode, the process reads in precomputed analysis data, as opposed to
standard CDP-ordered data. This precomputed data is generated using Velocity Analysis
Precompute. Preprocessing of data must be performed at the precomputing step.

Topics covered in this chapter:

Velocity Analysis Precompute


Velocity Analysis
Volume Viewer/Editor

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 12-1


Chapter 12: Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer

Chapter Objectives

6. Velocity Analysis

Velocity analysis is a critical aspect of any processing workflow. This


chapter explores one of ProMAXs techniques of picking and quality
controling velocities. Upon completion of this chapter you should:

Comprehend the parameters input to Velocity Analysis

Understand how to use the Velocity Analysis Viewer in conjunction


with the Volume Viewer/Editor

Be confident in picking reasonable stacking velocity functions

12-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark


Chapter 12: Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer

Velocity Analysis Introduction

Velocity Analysis is a InterProcess Communication tool (IPC tool);


therefore, preprocessing of data can be performed in the same flow
before passing the data on to the analysis. Velocity Analysis also allows
random access to the dataset. With this feature, you can go back to the
previously processed ensemble, rewind the data to the first CDP
specified in the sort order for dataset, or go to any CDP in the dataset by
specifying a new sort order.

Velocity Analysis is used to quickly pick velocities with the semblance


option. More detailed velocity information can be obtained by turning
on the constant velocity strip option and the interval velocity display.
Choice of the analysis locations is initially determined by selecting
analysis locations using the Supergather Formation. Picks can be made
on either the semblance plots or the constant velocity strips, and picks
made on one display will appear on the other display.

Velocity Analysis only processes single ensembles of data, such as


CDPs or groups of CDPs. Creating supergathers prior to Velocity
Analysis is often helpful to boost the fold in the ensembles and create
more robust semblance calculations. Supergathers must be defined in a
processing flow before input to Velocity Analysis or Velocity Analysis
Pre-Compute. The Supergather Formation* Macro may be used to
combine many CDPs. This will permit Velocity Analysis to read the
combined CDPs for one analysis as one ensemble of data.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 12-3


Chapter 12: Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer

Velocity Analysis Precompute

Precomputing data at selected locations is also supported to speed the


interactive session. Velocity Analysis Precompute provides a means to
prepare the data to be input to the Velocity Analysis module by
calculating the semblance values, stacking the CDP traces to create the
supergather, and creating CVS traces at predefined locations CDP.

When used in the precomputed mode, Velocity Analysis reads in only


the precomputed data, as opposed to standard CDP ordered data.
Preprocessing of data must be performed at the precomputing step.

Precomputing velocity analysis data can significantly speed up the


interactive Velocity Analysis session, especially when a large number of
CDPs are used to create the supergathers.

12-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark


Chapter 12: Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer

Precompute Velocity Analysis


1. Build the following flow to start Velocity Analysis Precompute:

Editing Flow: 6.1-Velocity Precompute

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Supergather Formation*
Read data from other lines/surveys?: ---------------------No
Select dataset: -----------------------Shots-decon/refr statics
Presort in memory or on disk?: -----------------------Memory
Maximum CDP fold: ---------------------------------------------180
Minimum center cdp number---------------------------------825
Maximum center cdp number--------------------------------950
Cdp increment--------------------------------------------------------25
Cdps to combine-------------------------------------------------------9
Bandpass Filter
Ormsby frequency filter values: -------------------3-6-50-60
----Default all remaining parameters----
Automatic Gain Control
----Default all parameters for this process----
Velocity Analysis Precompute
Disk Data Output

This flow is continued on the next page

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 12-5


Chapter 12: Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer

Editing Flow: 6.1-Velocity Precompute

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Supergather Formation*
Bandpass Filter
Automatic Gain Control
Velocity Analysis Precompute
Number of CDPs to sum into gather: --------------------------9
Apply partial NMO-to-binning:--------------------------------Yes
Apply differential CDP mean statics?:---------------------Yes
Absolute offset of first bin center: -------------------------27.5
Bin size for vertically summing offsets: -------------------55
Maximum offset: ---------------------------------------------6572.5
Use absolute value of offset for stacking?: --------------Yes
Minimum semblance analysis value: -------------------7000
Maximum semblance analysis value: ----------------20000
Number of semblance calculations:--------------------------50
Semblance sample rate (in ms): ------------------------------20
Semblance calculation window (in ms): -------------------40
Number of stack velocity functions: -------------------------17
Number of CDPS per stack strip---------------------------------5
Scale stacks by number of live samples summed:---Yes
Method of computing stack velocity functions:--------------
----------------------------------------------Top/base range
Velocity variation at time 0: ---------------------1000
Velocity variation at maximum time:---------3000
Velocity guide function table name:------------------------------
------------------------------------imported from ascii file
Maximum stretch percentage for NMO: --------------------30
Long offset moveout correction?:-------------------------NONE
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: ------------------------------------------
------------------------Precomputed Velocity Analysis

12-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark


Chapter 12: Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer

2. Select your best prestack dataset for Supergather Formation.

Supergather Formation is a macro that reads the data as CDPs, and


combines them into supergathers. Data should be preprocessed
gathers without NMO. Set the Maximum CDP fold to 180 (9 CDPs
times 20 fold per CDP). Set the Min and Max CDP centers to 825
and 950 respectively. Set the CDP increment to 25. This will give
you six analysis locations with supergathers starting at CDPs 825,
850, 875, 900, 925, 950.

3. Apply a bandpass filter.

For velocity analysis, it is usually desirable to limit the frequency


range of the input data. Select Ormsby filter values of 3-6-50-60.

4. Apply Automatic Gain Control.

For velocity analysis, a relatively short AGC window is usually


desirable. The default value of 500 ms will work fine for this
exercise.

5. Set parameters for Velocity Analysis Precompute.

Set the number of CDPs to sum into gathers as 9, and set the bin
sizes.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 12-7


Chapter 12: Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer

6. Select Yes to Apply partial NMO-to-binning.

Supergather input to Velocity Analysis has


reduced spatial separation between traces
compared to the original CDP gather

Arrows indicate the direction


of the Partial NMO

One
Group
Interval

Partial NMO and SUM Move the Traces to the NMO of the Bin Centers

Full NMO and SUM Flatten the Traces to the Zero Offset Time of the Gather

12-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark


Chapter 12: Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer

7. Select minimum and maximum semblance values to 7000 and


20000, and set the number of stack velocity functions to 17.

8. Select Top/base range as the method of computing stack velocity


functions.

9. Create a new Disk Data Output file called Precomputed


Velocity Analysis.

10. Execute the flow.

Velocity Analysis
In this flow we will set the prameters for velocity analysis to use the
precomputed data from the previous flow.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 12-9


Chapter 12: Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer

1. Build the following Velocity Analysis flow:

Editing Flow: 6.2-Velocity Analysis

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: ------------Precomputed Velocity Analysis
Trace read option:-----------------------------------------------Sort
Interactive Data Access?:---------------------------------------Yes
Select primary trace header entry:-------SG_CDP
Velocity Analysis
Select display DEVICE: -----------------------------This Screen
Is the incoming data Precomputed?: ----------------------Yes
Submenu Set which items are visible?---------------------------------No
Controls Set semblance scaling and autosnap parameters?:--No
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Semblance normalization mode: ---Scale Time Slice
Contrast power factor: ------------------------------------- 1.
Contrast noise factor: ------------------------------------- 0.1
Automatically snap------------------------------------------No
Maximum velocity % change for snapping: ----------5
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum vertical change for snapping: ------------------40
Display horizon(s)?: -----------------------------------------------No
Use neural network velocity picker?: -----------------------No
Interact with other processes using PD?:-----------------Yes
Get guide function from existing parameter table?---Yes
Velocity guide function table name: -----------------
------------------------------------imported from ascii file
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum stretch percentage for NMO: --------------------30
Long offset moveout correction?:-------------------------NONE
Interval velocity below last knee: ------------------------------0
Table to store velocity picks: -------vels from precompute
Copy picks to next location------------------------------------No
>Volume Viewer/Editor*<

12-10 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark


Chapter 12: Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer

2. Set the Disk Data Input parameters as shown. Make sure to sort the
input data by the user-defined header word SG_CDP.

3. Set the Velocity Analysis parameters.

When you first parameterize the Velocity Analysis process, a subset


of the parameters will be visible so begin by setting the global
parameters highlighted in the flow. Be sure to create a table to store
velocity picks such as vels from precompute.

Next, select Yes for Set semblance scaling and autosnap parameters
to display the semblance submenu. The default settings will work
fine so turn off the semblance submenu by clicking No for Set
semblance scaling and autosnap parameters. The submenu
parameter settings will be retained and used even though they are
not visible.

The parameter Set which items are visible works the same way. Both
the visiblity and semblance parameters can also be changed
interactively from within the velocity analysis tool.

NOTE:

The Velocity Analysis parameters are only our initial guesses. Once inside the
Velocity Analysis Viewer we can change any of the parameters interactively.

4. Execute the flow.

The display shows a velocity semblance plot, a corresponding CDP


gather or CDP supergather sorted by absolute offset, the dynamic
stack positive and negative polarity, and the varying velocity stack
strip panels.

5. The panel menus allows you to control several other items


including the semblance scale, interval velocities derived from the
RMS picks, and guide functions from previous velocity picks. From
this menu you can also change the trace scaling.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 12-11


Chapter 12: Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer

Velocity analysis window

Velocity Analysis Icons


Next ensemble: Proceed to and process the next ensemble in the
dataset. If you are currently processing the last ensemble in the
dataset, this button is inactive.

Previous ensemble: Step backward one ensemble and process. If


you are currently processing the first ensemble of the dataset, this
button is inactive.

Rewind: Rewind the dataset and go back to the first ensemble as


specified in the sort order. If you are currently processing the first
ensemble in the dataset, this button is inactive.

12-12 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark


Chapter 12: Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer

Point Dispatcher(PD): save and send the velocity picks in the


current ensemble to the Velocity Viewer/Editor. This icon works
only when Velocity Viewer/Editor is running, and you have told it
to interact with Velocity Analysis.

6. Pick a stacking velocity function for the first ensemble.

Activate the picking icon, and begin picking a function with MB1.
You can pick in either the semblance display, or the velocity stack
strips display. As you pick velocities on the semblance plot, the
picks are also displayed on the velocity strips, and vice versa. Use
the Next ensemble icon to move to the next analysis location

After you pick the first location and move to the second you may
want to overlay the function that you just picked as a second guide.
You can do this by clicking on View Object visibility...
Average of all CDPs (blue). This will display the average of all of
the functions that have been picked in the output table to date.

7. Experiment with some of the other display attributes such as View


Object visibility... Velocity Color Key, and View Object
visibility... Interval Velocity. If your workstation performance
suffers such as slow redraws, turn off the more resource intensive
attributes.

Once you have determined your favorite settings, you can set the
flow parameters so your Velocity Analysis display is automatically
configured that way..

NOTE:

Your velocity picks are automatically saved to an RMS velocity ordered parameter
file when you move from one location to the next or Exit the program. You also have
the option to save picks using the Table/Save Picks option.

Using the Volume Viewer


As you pick velocities along a line using the Velocity Analysis tool, you
may want to QC the picked velocity field. This can be accomplished by
simultaneously viewing a color isovelocity display of the entire velocity
volume. The tool used for this is a standalone process called the Volume
Viewer/Editor, and should be executed while you are running Velocity
Analysis, as outlined below.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 12-13


Chapter 12: Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer

1. After picking and saving at least one velocity analysis location,


iconify the Velocity Analysis Window.

2. Return to the ProMAX User Interface. Toggle off all processes and
add Volume Viewer/Editor to the flow.

3. Parameterize Volume Viewer/Editor as follows.

Editing Flow: 6.2-Velocity Analysis

Add Delete Execute View Exit

>Disk Data Input<


>Velocity Analysis<
Volume Viewer/Editor*
Display DEVICE for cross-section: -------------This Screen
Work in Time or Depth: -------------------------------------- Time
Unit System: -----------------------------------------------DataBase
Source of surface coordinate limits: ---------Seismic Data
Source of depth coordinate limits: ------------Seismic Data
Input Volume Type------------------ Stacking (RMS) Velocity
Select input volume: -------vels from precompute
To which datum is the velocity volume referenced?:------
-----------------------------------------------Floating Datum
Display seismic data?: ------------------------------------------Yes
Select poststack data file: --------STK-refr statics
To which datum are the stack data referenced?:----------
---------------------------------------------------Final Datum
To which datum are the horizons referenced?:-------------
---------------------------------------------------Final Datum
Interact with other processes using PD?: --------------- Yes
Display gather locations?:--------------------------------------Yes

Make sure you use the same velocity table that you are currently
using in Velocity Analysis.

Also, make sure you select Yes to Interact with other processes
using PD? This will allow the PD (point dispatcher) to
communicate with Velocity Analysis.

12-14 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark


Chapter 12: Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer

4. Execute the flow containing the Volume Viewer/Editor, and return


to the Velocity Analysis display.

The Volume Viewer/Editor window will eventually appear. Unless


you have two screens, you will want to try different ways of
arranging the windows on the screen until you have made an
arrangement that is workable for you.

The following diagram illustrates one way to arrange the windows


on the screen:

Possible Window Arrangement

If you have not picked any velocities, the display will contain zero
values and the screen will be all blue and the velocity scale will be
very large. If you have picked at least one velocity function, you will
only see a vertical color variation in the Cross Section window.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 12-15


Chapter 12: Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer

5. From the Velocity Viewer/Editor window, click on


View Volume Display.

A Volume Controls window will appear. Click on the


Cross-section Nodes button, then Ok. This will display vertical
lines in the Cross Section window indicating the positions of the
Velocity Analysis centers already saved to the velocity table. The
locations of these lines are referred to as nodes.

6. In the Velocity Analysis window, pick or modify the velocity


function for the current location.

7. In the Velocity Analysis display, click on the bow-and-arrow PD


icon to send the new information to the Volume Viewer/Editor.

The velocity displayed in Volume Viewer/Editor updates in response


to picks made in Velocity Analysis. You should now see a vertical
line in the Cross Section window at the CDP location of the velocity
function just picked.

8. In the Velocity Analysis window, click on the Next ensemble icon,


and pick the next analysis location.

When you are finished picking this new analysis location, click on
the Next ensemble icon again. This will not only move you to the
next analysis location, but will automatically send the velocity picks
just made to the Volume Viewer/Editor displays.

9. In the Volume Viewer/Editor window, click on the PD icon.

Any Velocity Analysis CDP location can be easily retrieved or


deleted from Volume Viewer/Editor through the use of the mouse.
This allows random access to any of the precomputed and picked
locations.

Velocity Analysis Pointing Dispather


By activating this icon, you can select a CDP and send it to Velocity
Analysis. This icon does not appear if No was selected for Interact with
Velocity Analysis? in the Velocity Viewer/Editor menu.

With the PD icon activated, position the mouse cursor over a node.
The cursor should change from an x to an o. Click MB1 to
retrieve that velocity function into the Velocity Analysis display.
Clicking MB2 deletes that analysis location.

12-16 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark


Chapter 12: Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer

10. Try moving to a previous location by selecting it in the Volume


Viewer window.

11. Continue picking velocities in Velocity Analysis until you finish all
of the locations on this project.

Remember, you may either use the bow-and-arrow PD icon to


send the picks from Velocity Analysis to the Volume Viewer/Editor
displays for QC before moving to the next analysis location, or you
may move directly to the next ensemble and your previous picks will
be automatically sent to the Volume Viewer/Editor displays.

12. To finish picking, first make sure that the Point Dispatcher PD
icon in Volume Viewer is deactivated. Then in Velocity Analysis,
click on the File Exit/stop flow pull down menu in the velocity
analysis and the File Exit pull down in the Volume Viewer/
Editor.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 12-17


Chapter 12: Velocity Analysis and the Volume Viewer

Chapter Summary

Upon completion of this chapter you should be able to answer the


following questions:

Do you understand the parameters input to Velocity Analysis?

Can you operate the Velocity Analysis Viewer in conjunction with


the Volume Viewer/Editor?

Are you confident in picking a reasonable stacking velocity


function?

12-18 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark


Chapter 13
Residual Statics Corrections
Although datum static corrections have been applied to remove travel-time effects of elevation
changes along the seismic line, it may still be necessary to remove residual near-surface travel-
time delays that are the result of varying velocity and/or varying depth of the weathering layer.
ProMAX offers several residual statics processes. All are surface consistent solutions except for
the Trim Statics routines.

Topics covered in this chapter:

Autostatics Flowchart
Data Preparation for Input to Residual Statics
Calculation of Residual Statics
QC and Application of Residual Statics
External Model Autostatics Overview
External Model Autostatics Flowchart

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 13-1


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

Chapter Objectives

7. Residual Statics

To correct for high frequency variations in the near surface weathering


not solved by elevation/refraction statics or velocities, some type of
residual statics is almost always applied for land data. High frequency
can be thought of as shorter than one cable length. This chapter explores
some of ProMAXs techniques of calculating residual statics. Upon
completion of this chapter you should:

Know how to prepare data for input to Residual Statics

Understand how Surface Consistent Statics are calculated

Understand how Trim Statics are calculated

Be able to build a Model Stack to pilot some of the statics routines

13-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

Autostatics Flowchart

Autostatics
Flowchart

1. Pre-Process
(geometry, gain recovery,
noise reduction, deconvolution,
refraction or elevation statics,
NMO, BPF, AGC)

RMS 2. Apply NMO and


Velocities Sort to CDPs

CDP
Stack

Pick
Autostatics
Horizon

3. Calculate Residual Statics

Correlation Autostatics Max. Power Autostatics


SIN:STATICS:SCORxxxx SIN:STATICS:SPWRxxxx
SRF:STATICS:RCORxxxx SRF:STATICS:RPWRxxxx

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 13-3


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

Data Preparation for Input to Residual Statics

All of the residual statics process are standalone and require that all
preprocessing be applied to the data and output to a disk dataset prior to
executing the residual statics processes. At this point in the processing
sequence, the input to autostatics should have geometry information,
gain recovery, noise reduction, deconvolution, refraction or elevation
statics, and NMO applied.

In addition to normal preprocessing, you may want to filter unwanted


high and low frequency noise by band limiting the input data, and scale
the data with an AGC.

To execute an external model autostatics method, you will need to create


an enhanced stack as the model using any of the signal enhancement
techniques available in ProMAX. This will be covered in the section on
External Model Autostatics.

Data preparation and horizon picking for residual statics


In this exercise you are simply preparing a prestack dataset for input to
autostatics, as well as picking your autostatic horizons on poststack data.

13-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

1. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: 7.1-Data Prep for Res. Statics

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: -----------------------Shots-decon/refr statics
Trace read option: -----------------------------------------------Sort
Interactive Data Access?: ---------------------------------------No
Select primary trace header entry: -----------------------CDP
Select secondary trace header entry: -----------------NONE
Sort order for dataset: -------------------------------------------- */
Normal Moveout Correction
SELECT Velocity parameter file: --vels from precompute
Automatic Gain Control
----Default all parameters----
Bandpass Filter
Ormsby filter frequency values: ---------------- 5-10-40-50
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: ------CDP-input to res. statics
>Disk Data Input<
>Trace Display<

2. In Disk Data Input, select your best pre-stack data.

3. In NMO, select your best RMS velocity parameter table.

4. Apply an AGC and bandpass filter to clean the data going into
residual statics calculation.

A 500 ms AGC gate width is sufficient. Apply Bandpass Filter to


remove the lowest and highest frequencies, such as 5-10-40-50 Hz.

5. Output your NMO corrected CDPs to a new file CDP-input to


res. statics.

This data is input into the residual statics process in a later flow.

6. Execute the flow.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 13-5


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

7. Residual statics processes require that reference horizons


(autostatics horizons) are picked from a preliminary stack and
saved in a parameter table. Edit the following flow:

Editing Flow: 7.1-Data Prep for Res. Statics

Add Delete Execute View Exit

>Disk Data Input<


>Normal Moveout Correction<
>Automatic Gain Control<
>Bandpass Filter<
>Disk Data Output<
Disk Data Input
Select Dataset: -----------------------------------STK-refr statics
Trace read option: --------------------------------------------Get All
Trace Display
Primary trace LABELING header entry: --------------NONE
Secondary trace LABELING header entry: ------------CDP

8. Input your refraction statics stack.

9. Execute the flow.

13-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

10. From the menu bar in Trace Display, select Picking Pick
Autostatics Horizons...

Picking Autostatics Horizon

11. A Table Selector window appears. Enter a new table name


horizon1 and select OK.

Enter smash=11 (CDP traces). Smash is the number of CDPs to sum


along the horizon to form the model trace for correlation. Gate width
is symmetric about the picks. For steeply dipping areas a smash of 3
to 5 should be used. For flatter areas smash values of 11 to 21 are
valid.

Enter a gate width=100 (ms). The gate width should be bigger than
twice the maximum residual static expected. In swampy/marshy
areas this may be a large value. Click on OK when finished.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 13-7


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

12. Pick a horizon using MB1. This identifies the center of the time
gate. Horizons may extend across the entire dataset or cover only a
portion of the data. CDPs not included in a horizon will not be
included in residual statics calculations for that horizon.

NOTE:

Autostatics horizons are picked from stacked data that has been shifted to the final
datum. The residual statics processes automatically shifts these time horizons to the
processing datum, the same datum input CDP gathers are referenced to. This
process of applying C_STATIC to the horizons is automatic and transparent to the
user.

13. Additional horizons (up to 500) may be picked by clicking in the


trace display area with MB3 and choosing a new layer.

You will be prompted to enter a new smash value and time gate for
each horizon. Notice also the new horizon is represented in the Pick
Layers window with a number in parentheses.

The residual statics process will average the static solutions in areas
of overlapping windows. About a 10 trace overlap should provide a
smooth transition between static solutions. Too much overlap can
lead abrupt edges to the static solution.

14. To quit and save the autostatics horizon parameter table select
File Exit/Stop Flow.

Select Yes when asked to save your work.

13-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

Calculation of Residual Statics

ProMAX offers nine internal model surface consistent residual statics


methods and three CDP consistent (trim) statics methods:

Correlation Autostatics

Cross Correlation Sum External Model Autostatics

Cycle Skip Analysis Autostatics

Differential Autostatics

Gauss-Seidel External Model Autostatics

Hybrid Genetic Algorithm /Steepest Ascent Autostatics

Maximum Power Autostatics

Steepest Ascent Autostatics

Summed Differential Autostatics

CDP Trim Statics: non surface consistent

Horizon Trim Statics: non surface consistent

Time Varying Trim Statics: non surface consistent

The most commonly used surface consistent methods are Correlation


Autostatics and Maximum Power Autostatics. The max power
method has proven very robust for good and bad data areas. The only
downside to max power is that it is a little more expensive in terms of
CPU usage. The max power simply maximize the power of the stack by
shifting each trace and stacking for the maximum power. The CDP
Trim Statics works similar, except the shifts are applied in the CDP
domain, and thus the shifts are blind to surface consistency. Most of the
methods have some problems at the edges and low fold areas. These
edge problems are often corrected by editing the erroneous values in the
database. Choose a method based on data quality, magnitude of statics
problem, and merits of the residual statics method. Parameter selection
for each method is also based on data quality and magnitude of statics
problem. If nothing seems to work use Gauss-Seidel External Model
Autostatics.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 13-9


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

Autostatics calculation
In this exercise, you will calculate residual statics using Maximum
Power and Correlation Autostatics. An additional exercise at the end of
this section describes the external model routines, Gauss-Seidel
External Model Autostatics and Cross Correlation Sum External Model
Autostatics.

1. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: 7.2-Calculate Residual Statics

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Correlation Autostatics*
Select Trace data file: -------------CDP-input to res. statics
Select Autostatics HORIZON file: --------------------horizon1
Select Autostatics VELOCITY file: vels from precompute
Maximum velocity error (percent): ----------------------------5.
Number of CDPs for velocity smoothing: -----------------51
Minimum # of traces for vel. estimate: ---------------------36
Minimum % of offset range for vel. estimate: ------------25
Maximum statics allowed (milliseconds): -----------------20
Statics partitioning iterations: -----------------------------------4
Minimum live samples in a gate (percent): ---------------60
Seek/report reversed sources/receivers/channels: Yes
Create a NEW database entry for each run?: -----------No
>2D/3D Max. Power Autostatics*<

2. Select your NMO corrected CDP gathers as the input trace data to
Correlation Autostatics. Select your autostatic horizon and RMS
velocity tables.

Correlation Autostatics* uses a Gauss-Seidel method to partition


statics into velocities, as well as source, receiver, channel and
structure statics.

3. Execute the flow.

Upon completion, click on View from the Flow menu and look at the
contents of the job.output file. Check the range of source and
receiver statics values. Do you have any reversed traces?

13-10 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

4. Edit the previous flow.

Editing Flow: 7.2-Calculate Residual Statics

Add Delete Execute View Exit

>Correlation Autostatics*<
2D/3D Max. Power Autostatics*
Select Trace data file: -------------CDP-input to res. statics
Select Autostatics horizon file: -----------------------horizon1
RMS statics change convergence criteria: -------------0.05
Maximum number of iterations: ------------------------------10
Minimum live samples in a gate (percent): ---------------60
Maximum static allowed (ms): -------------5,7,10,15,20(6)
Correlation accept percent: -------------------------------------10
Compute Statics for whole line?: ----------------------------Yes
Use envelope of correlations?: --------------------------------No
Apply previously computed residuals?: -------------------No
Restrict offsets?: ----------------------------------------------------No
Final minimum static: ------------------------------------------- -20
Final maximum static: --------------------------------------------20
Run ID: --------------------------------------------------------------0000
Report static values after each iteration?: ----------------No

5. In 2D/3D Max. Power Autostatics*, input your NMO corrected


CDP gathers. Select your autostatic horizon tables. The Maximum
static allowed is per iteration. We start these values out low in order
to keep the solution from immediately diverging. Set the remaining
parameters as indicated above.

2D/3D Max. Power Autostatics* estimates source, receiver and


channel statics by maximizing the CDP stack power.

6. Execute the flow.

Upon completion, click on View from the Flow menu and look at the
contents of the job.output file. Check to see if your solution has
converged. Also check the range of source and receiver statics
values.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 13-11


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

QC and Application of Residual Statics

Quality control of residual static results can be achieved by several


methods:

Utilizing the Database display tool.


Comparison of stacks with and without residual statics applied.
Comparison of stacks with different residual statics methods
applied.

13-12 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

Compare Static Solutions in the Database


A quick QC tool is to examine the computed static values with the
Database display tool.

1. From the Flows menu select the Database option, and then select
Database XDB Database Display from the main DBTools
menu. Select Database Get from the XDB display.

2. Select SRF order, Statics infotype, and the two statics files
RCOR000 & RPWR000.

Database plot of Receiver statics

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 13-13


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

The source (SIN) and receiver (SRF) statics for Correlation


Autostatics are SCOR0000 and RCOR0000.

The source (SIN) and receiver (SRF) statics for Maximum Power
Autostatics are SPWR0000 and RPWR0000.

Computed static values from several methods can be plotted


simultaneously for comparison. Values can then be zeroed or edited
from this database display. See mouse button helps for instruction.

3. Quality Factors computed by each method are also output to the


database.

Quality Factors can be used as a criteria for zeroing statics values or


editing shots and receivers.

The quality factor file naming convention is S_CQ0000, and


R_CQ0000. Quality factors from several methods can be displayed
simultaneously to compare reliability of the computed statics.
Statics with low quality factor values relative to neighboring values
can be zeroed or the receivers could be edited. Quality factors can be
used to weight traces before CDP stack. For more information see
the Residual Statics helpfile.

13-14 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

Compare Autostatics Stacks


1. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: 7.3-Compare Autostatics Stacks

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Compare Autostatics Stack


SELECT input trace data file: --CDP-input to res. statics
SPECIFY the input CDP range(s): ----1-100000/
Temporary SCRATCH data file: -----------------------Scratch
Automatically delete this file upon completion?:
----------------------------------------------------------------Yes
Normal database entry naming mode?: -----------------Yes
Type of residual statics to apply: --------------------
------------------------------------Correlation Autostatics
Select display DEVICE: -----------------------------This Screen
Number of traces per display screen: --------------------215

This is a stand-alone macro that enables you to compare a


preliminary stack without residual statics to a stack with residual
statics. It uses the Screen Display process.

2. Execute (with MB2) and use the screen swap feature to compare
stacks.

3. Execute this flow again (with MB2) using the Max. Power
Autostatics.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 13-15


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

Compare two or more Autostatics Stacks


1. Build a flow for comparing stacked results from two or more statics
methods. Use the following flow to get started:

Editing Flow: 7.3-Compare Autostatics Stacks

Add Delete Execute View Exit

>Compare Autostatics Stack<


Disk Data Input
Select dataset: -----------------------CDP-input to res. statics
Trace read option: --------------------------------------------Get All
Reproduce Traces
Trace grouping to reproduce: --------------------------All Data
Total number of datasets: ----------------------------------------2
IF
Apply Residual Statics
Type of residual statics: -----------Correlation Autostatics
Trace Display Label
Trace label:------------------------------Correlation Autostatics
ELSE
Apply Residual Statics
Type of residual statics: ----------Max. Power Autostatics
Trace Display Label
Trace label:-----------------------------Max. Power Autostatics
ENDIF
Apply Fractional Static
Automatic Gain Control
Bandpass Filter
Ormsby filter frequency values: -------------------3-6-50-60
CDP/Ensemble Stack
Trace Display
Primary trace LABELING header entry: ---------------None
Secondary trace LABELING header entry: ------------CDP

13-16 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

External Model Autostatics Overview

ProMAX currently offers two surface consistent autostatics routines for


use with an external model (pilot). Both require using the External
Model Correlation tool which correlates prestack traces with the model.
Since correlation pick times can be written to the TRC database, these
may also be applied directly to the data as external model trim statics.

A typical External Model Autostatics job flow consists of four phases:


external model building, correlation computation, statics computation,
and statics application. The input to the external model building can be
any stack of the dataset. This allows you to use the data enhancement
techniques available in ProMAX to improve the model stack. For
example, you can apply trace mixing, 2D filtering, or F-X decon to a
brute stack to generate the model stack. Another method would be to use
the Eigen Stack process to produce the model stack.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 13-17


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

External Model Autostatics Flowchart

External Model Autostatics


Flowchart

1. Pre-Process
(geometry, gain recovery,
noise reduction, deconvolution,
refraction or elevation statics,
NMO, BPF, AGC)

RMS SIN:STATICS:SGEMxxxx
Vels 2. Apply NMO and
Sort to CDPs SRF:STATICS:SGEMxxxx

5a. EMC
Gauss Seidel

Eigen TRC
Matrix 3. Eigen 4. External STATICS
Time Stack Model TRM0001
Gate
Correlation
Correlations
(trace data)

Autostatics
Horizon 5b. EMC
Xcor Sum

SIN:STATICS:SPEMxxxx
SRF:STATICS:SPEMxxxx

13-18 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

Create Eigen Stack


Eigen Stack process uses the Eigen vector decomposition techniques to
isolate the principle component of the trace matrix from a supergather
of pre-stack traces. Conceptually, the wavelet on the stack trace after
eigen stack is more similar to the wavelets on the prestack data than a
conventional stack. Theory says that all of the wavelets recorded from a
reflection point are the same. These wavelets are time shifted due to near
surface velocity variations. Typically we measure these time variations
by cross correlating the pre-stack traces with a stacked trace. The Eigen
Stack process attempts to make the stacked trace wavelet that is as
similar as possible to the wavelet of the pre-stack traces. This should
improve the cross correlation process by creating a higher resolution
pilot trace. The cost of this process, however, is that some of the
structural information may be lost. Some writings may refer to an Eigen
stack as a K-L transform. Note that this is the same technology as the
government uses for pattern recognition in scanning retinas or for
enhancing faces on photographs.
Input Traces on CDP with NMO applied

Conventional Stack
Model Trace

Eigen Stack
Principal Component input traces
Model Trace

Cartoon of Eigen Stack Decomposition

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 13-19


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

You first need to pick a time gate that will be used in the Eigen Stack
process:

1. Build the following flow to pick an eigen matrix time gate on NMO
corrected CDP gathers.

Editing Flow: 7.4-Eigen Stack

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: -----------------------CDP-input to res. statics
Trace read option: -----------------------------------------------Sort
Interactive Data Access?: --------------------------------------Yes
Select primary trace header entry: -----------------------CDP
Sort order for dataset: ----------------------------800-950(25)/
>Eigen Stack<
>Disk Data Output<
Trace Display
Number of ENSEMBLES (line segments)/screen: -----10
Primary trace LABELING header entry: ----------------CDP
Secondary trace LABELING header entry: -----------None

2. Input a range of CDP gathers and execute the flow.

13-20 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

3. From the Trace Display menu bar, select Picking Pick


Miscellaneous Time Gates...

Pick Time Gate

4. Input a gate name like eigen gate.

5. Select a secondary key of CDP, and pick a window from a data area
that has a high Signal/Noise ratio. Make sure that your window
includes the area of interest. Use MB3 inside of the Trace Display
area to select a new layer for the bottom of the window. This
display is also a good QC to check your velocities. If the CDP
gathers are not flat you may have a problem with your velocities.

6. Save picks and exit the Trace Display.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 13-21


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

7. Edit the flow to generate an Eigen Stack.

Editing Flow: 7.4-Eigen Stack

Add Delete Execute View Exit

>Disk Data Input<


Disk Data Input
Select dataset: -----------------------CDP-input to res. statics
Trace read option: --------------------------------------------Get All
Eigen Stack
Mode: --------------------------------------------Output Eigenstack
Get matrix design gates from DATABASE?: ------------Yes
SELECT design gate parameter file: ------------eigen gate
Type of Computations?: ---------------------------------------Real
Horizontal window width: ----------------------------------------5
Number of iterations: -----------------------------------------------0
Apply final datum statics after stack?: ------------------Yes
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: ---------------------------STK-eigen
>Trace Display<

The Eigen Stack process stacks flat events in a CDP gather. Events
with large trace to trace moveout will not be included in the output
Eigen Stack.

8. In Disk Data Output, output a new dataset STK-eigen. This is


used for subsequent input to the external model correlation builder.

9. Execute the flow.

13-22 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

10. Edit the flow to pick autostatics horizons on your Eigen Stack.

Editing Flow: 7.4-Eigen Stack

Add Delete Execute View Exit

>Disk Data Input<


>Disk Data Input<
>Eigen Stack<
>Disk Data Output<
Disk Data Input
Select dataset: -------------------------------------------STK-eigen
Trace read option: --------------------------------------------Get All
Trace Display
Primary trace LABELING header entry: ---------------None
Secondary trace LABELING header entry: ------------CDP

11. Execute the flow.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 13-23


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

12. From the menu bar in Trace Display, select Picking Pick
Autostatics Horizons...

Pick horizon for Autostatics

Enter a new table name and click on OK.

Enter smash=1 (in traces) and the gate width=300 ms and click on
OK.

For an external model, the smash is not used. Therefore, give it a


value of 1. The pilot traces have already been somewhat smashed
together by creating the Eigen Stack.

13-24 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

Pick a horizon using MB1. This identifies the center of the time gate.
Horizons may extend across the entire dataset or cover only a
portion of the data. CDPs not included in a horizon are not included
in residual statics calculations for that horizon.

NOTE:

Autostatics horizons are picked from stacked data that has been shifted to the final
datum. The residual statics processes automatically shift these time horizons to the
processing datum, the same datum input CDP gathers are referenced to. This
process is automatic and transparent to the user.

13. Additional horizons (up to 500) may be picked by clicking MB3 in


the trace display area and choosing a new layer.

You will be prompted to enter a new smash value and time gate for
each horizon. Notice also the new horizon is represented in the Pick
Layers window with a number in parentheses.

14. To automatically move picks to the nearest peak or trough, click


with MB3 in the data area and choose the appropriate snap.

15. Save your autostatics horizon picks and exit Trace Display.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 13-25


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

16. Build this flow to generate correlations:

Editing Flow: 7.5-External Model Correlations

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: -----------------------CDP-input to res. statics
Trace read option: --------------------------------------------Get All
External Model Correlation
Select model trace dataset: -------------------------STK-eigen
Use autostatics horizon or gate file: --------------HORIZON
Select autostatics horizon file: ------EMC horizon
Minimum live samples in a gate(percent): ----------------60
Maximum static shift: ---------------------------------------------20
Write correlation pick TIMES to the database?: -------Yes
Write correlation pick AMPLITUDES to the database?: -
----------------------------------------------------------------Yes
Write quality control estimates to the database?: ----Yes
Database mode: ---------------------------------Overwrite/
New Enter 4 Digit ID number:------------------0001
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: -------------------------correlations

17. In Disk Data Input, input the NMO corrected CDP gathers.

18. Select External Model Correlation parameters.

Select Eigen Stack for the model trace dataset and select your
autostatics horizons for the Horizon file.

19. In Disk Data Output, output the correlation trace data.

The correlation trace data is used in EMC Autostat: Xcor Sum*.

20. Execute the flow.

13-26 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

21. Build the following flow to calculate your residual statics using
EMC Autostat: Gauss-Seidel*:

Editing Flow: 7.6-EMC Autostatics

Add Delete Execute View Exit

EMC Autostat: Gauss-Seidel*


Select TRC database correlation pick entry:-----------------
------------------------------- TRC:STATICS: TRM_0000
Statics partitioning iterations: -----------------------------------7
Maximum source or receiver static: -------------------------20
Min trace offset MAGNITUDE for inclusion: ---------------0.
Max trace offset MAGNITUDE for inclusion: ----999999.
Weight solutions by pick quality factors: ----------------Yes
Alpha trimmed mean percentage for pick exclusion:--40
Length of the CDP structure smoothing: ---------------------3
Dampen the structure term at low fold?: ----------------Yes
Create a NEW database entry for each run?: -----------No
>EMC Autostat: Xcor Sum*<

22. For Gauss-Seidel, select TRC - STATICS - TRM_0000 from the


Ordered Parameter Files.

These time shifts will be decomposed into the source (SIN), receiver
(SRF), and structure (CDP) statics.

23. Execute the flow.

Upon completion, click on View from the Flow menu and look at the
contents of the job.output file. You can graphically check the range
of source and receiver statics values in the database with DBTools or
XDB Database Display.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 13-27


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

24. Edit the previous flow to use EMC Autostat: Xcor Sum*.

Editing Flow: 7.6-EMC Autostatics

Add Delete Execute View Exit

>EMC Autostat: Gauss-Seidel*<


EMC Autostat: Xcor Sum*
Input correlations from Tape or Disk?: ------------------Disk
Select input correlation file:-------------Statics-correlations
First statics computation domain: ------------------------CDP
Second statics computation domain: -----------------Source
Third statics computation domain: -----------------Receiver
Fourth statics computation domain: -------------------NONE
Adjust correlations by a previous SOURCE static: ----No
Adjust correlations by a previous RECEIVER static: -No
Adjust correlations by a previous CDP RESIDUAL
STRUCTURE?: -------------------------------------------No
Method for correlation summing: ------Min/Max Exclude
Maximum source or receiver statics: ------------------------20
Create a NEW database entry for each run?: -----------No

25. In Xcor Sum, input the correlation trace data that was output from
the External Model Correlations flow.

These correlations are summed and then the maximum is picked


within the various domains in order to derive the statics.

26. Execute the flow.

Upon completion, click on View from the Flow building menu and
look at the contents of the job.output file. Check the range of source
and receiver statics values.

27. QC your results as you did earlier in this chapter.

Use the XDB Database Display and flow 7.3-Compare Autostatics


Stacks to do your comparisons.

In the database you will see SPEM0000 for both source and receiver
statics calculated using the Xcor Sum and SGEM0000 for the source
and receiver statics from Gauss-Seidel.

13-28 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

28. After comparing the various autostatics solutions, build the


following flow to apply the best solution.

Editing Flow: 7.7-Apply Residual Statics

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: ------------------------Shot-decon/refr statics
Trace read option: -----------------------------------------------Sort
Select primary trace header entry: -----------------------CDP
Sort order for dataset: -------------------------------------------- */
Apply Residual Statics
Type of residual statics to apply: ----EMC Gauss-Seidel
Normal Moveout Correction
SELECT Velocity parameter file: --vels from precompute
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: ---------CDP-decon/refr/resid
CDP/Ensemble Stack
Trace Display Label
Trace label: ----------------------------------------EMC GS Statics
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: ---------STK-decon/refr/resid
Trace Display
Primary trace LABELING header entry: ---------------None
Secondary trace LABELING header entry: ------------CDP

29. Fill in the parameters as listed above, and then execute the flow.

30. When you are finished viewing the stack in Trace Display, select
File Exit/Continue Flow.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 13-29


Chapter 13: Residual Statics Corrections

Chapter Summary

Upon completion of this chapter you should be able to answer the


following questions:

Can you prepare data for input to Residual Statics

What does it mean to be Surface Consistent

How are Surface Consistent Statics calculated

How are Trim Statics calculated

Can you build a Model Stack to pilot some of the statics routines

13-30 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 14
Dip Moveout (DMO)
Dip Moveout is also known as prestack partial migration where each data sample is migrated to its
zero offset position. This collapses the CMP smear induced by dipping reflectors. Not only is the
imaging of these dipping reflectors enhanced, but the stacking velocities picked after applying
DMO are dip independent. This improves velocities for stacking and migration. Also, lateral
resolution is increased and coherent noise is attenuated.

Before DMO is applied to the data, the trace data are typically grouped into offset bins using the
Trace Binning process. Once the data is binned, processes using Kirchhoff and F-K
implementations of DMO are available to perform the prestack partial migration.

Topics covered in this chapter:

Common Offset Binning


DMO
Final Stack

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 14-1


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

Chapter Objectives

8. Dip Moveout (DMO)

The advent of DMO in the 80s has greatly improved velocity


calculation, migration of dipping reflectors and noise reduction. DMO
improves the data because it migrates each sample to its zero offset
position. This collapses the CMP smear induced by dipping reflectors.
The DMO processes itself is quite simple, however, the prep of the input
data can be a little tricky to the new user. Upon completion of this
chapter you should:

Be able to Common Offset Bin data for input to DMO

Be familiar with some of the input parameters to DMO

Understand the basic theory of what DMO does to the data

14-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

Common Offset Binning

Common offset binning is a critical part of the DMO process. In this


step, we select traces belonging to common offset planes before
applying DMO. A rule of thumb is to build common offset binning to
create a maximum number of bins, yet still have 100% CDP coverage in
both the common offset section and each bin. Common offset planes can
be created with the Trace Binning process.

Trace Binning requires a list of bin centers and bin increments. For off-
end shooting, the minimum offset bin increment is typically specified as
either twice the shot interval or the nominal change in offset from trace
to trace within a CDP. For symmetric split spread geometries, the shot
interval should work. For asymmetric split spreads, the data will
determine which interval is appropriate. In general the rules of thumb
for DMO offset bin spacing are:

Marine: OFB = 2 X Shot Interval


Land Split Spread: OFB = 1 X Shot Interval
Land End On: OFB = 2 X Shot Interval

It is relatively simple to determine the center of the first common offset


bin. For example, assume that we have a survey with off-end shooting
where the shot interval is 200 m, the group interval is 100 m, and 300 m
is the distance to the first group. The shot-receiver offsets within this
survey would be:

300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900,.......

Since the shot interval of 200 m yields a bin increment of 400 m, the
center of your first offset bin would lie midway between 400 and 500,
or 450 m. Your DMO offset bins would now be 450 +/- 200, 850 +/-
200, 1250 +/- 200, etc. See diagram below:

300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400........

450 850 1250

Skidded shots, or other irregular shooting geometry, may place two or


more traces per CDP within a given DMO bin. Within the DMO
process, traces within the same DMO bin having identical CDP numbers
are stacked together prior to DMO.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 14-3


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

For regular shooting geometry, the recommended approach is to use


Trace Binning as a function of absolute offset followed by F-K DMO on
common offset ensemble. For datasets where the geometry is irregular
and it is difficult to get good population of offset planes, Ensemble
DMO in the T-X Domain should be run on common shot ensembles.

Determine trace binning parameters


In this exercise, you will compute common offset bin centers using the
off-end shooting assumptions. Recall that the first few shots on the line
resembled off-end shooting, and the last few shots were the normal split
spread geometry. We will then look at several database and trace
displays to check the binning parameters.

Bin centers may be based on either the signed offset or the absolute
value of the offset. If absolute value of offset is used, traces with the
same magnitude offset are combined in the same ensemble. You also
have the opportunity to vary the width of the offset bins (the bin
increment) as a function of trace offset. This may become important for
lines that were collected with a regular, but asymmetric split spread
geometry.

14-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

1. Build the following flow to view the first offset bin in your survey:

Editing Flow: 8.1-DMO Binning

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: --------------------------CDP-decon/refr/resid
Trace read option: -----------------------------------------------Sort
Interactive Data Access?: ---------------------------------------No
Select primary trace header entry: -----------------OFB_NO
Select secondary trace header entry: --------------------CDP
Sort order for dataset: ------------------------------------------*:*/
Ensemble Stack/Combine
Type of operation: -------------------------Combine and Stack
Input ensembles per output ensemble: ----------------------1
How are trace headers determined: ----------------Average
Secondary key bin size: ------------------------------------------1.
Maximum traces per output ensemble: ------------------215
Warnings if max traces/ensemble exceeded?: --------Yes
Select PRIMARY Trace Order Header Word: ----OFB_NO
Average the X and Y coordinates of primary key?: ---No
Select SECONDARY Trace Order Header Word: -----CDP
Output trace secondary key order: --------------Ascending
Print results?:---------------------------------------------------------No
Pad Traces
Header word to use for padding: --------------------------CDP
Spacing of header value: ------------------------------------------1
Remove traces?: ----------------------------------------------------No
Explicitly define the bounds of header values?: ------Yes
First trace header value: --------------------------------------775
Last trace header value: ---------------------------------------989
Trace Display
Primary trace LABELING header entry: ----------OFB_NO
Secondary trace LABELING header entry: ------------CDP

2. Use Disk Data Input to sort the data first by offset bin number (from
the Alternate List of header words) and then sort by CDP.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 14-5


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

3. Use Ensemble Stack/Combine to combine offset bins, and stack


any CDPs which are the same.

For this first exercise, we will only display the first offset bin, so set
the number of input ensembles/output ensemble to 1. We will use
this process later to combine more than one offset bin for display.

4. Pad missing CDPs with Pad Traces.

This process will insert a dead trace anytime the spacing between
CDPs is greater than 1.

5. Set the primary and secondary labeling headers in Trace Display to


OFB_NO, and CDP.

6. Execute the flow.

Notice that there are very few live CDPs for this single offset bin.
Since DMO operates in the offset domain, it would be desirable to

14-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

have offset bins that contain live traces for nearly all CDPs. This is
the reason that we merge several offset bins prior to performing
DMO.
7. Compute first guess at bin width and center of first bin.

For this geometry, the average shot interval is 220 ft. so the first
guess at a DMO offset bin width (using the off-end assumption)
would be 220 * 2 = 440 ft.

The near offset of this data is 27.5 ft. and the traces are 55 ft. apart,
so the source-receiver offsets would be:
27.5 82.5 137.5 192.5 247.5 302.5 357.5 412.5 467.5.....

220 660

For an offset bin width of 440 ft., the center of the first bin would lie
halfway between 192.5 and 247.5 or at 220 ft.

8. Modify the flow to display the data with a bin width of 440 ft.

Editing Flow: 8.1-DMO Binning

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Ensemble Stack/Combine
Input ensembles per output ensemble: ----------------------8
Average the primary key values?: -------------------------Yes
Pad Traces
Trace Display

9. The offset bin spacing for this line is 55 ft, so 8 offset bins would
equal 440 ft.

10. Execute the flow.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 14-7


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

Notice that most of the CDP locations are filled by live traces. This is
what we want for DMO binning.

If you were to display the data with a bin width of 220 ft. (4 offset bins)
you would see that a width of 220 ft. is adequate for the near offsets, but
too small at the farther offsets.

Remember that we have two conflicting goals in our DMO binning


process:

Create continuous CDP coverage in the offset bins to eliminate


DMO artifacts.
Create the greatest number of offset bins to enhance DMO velocity
analysis.

14-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

11. Next we will view the DMO binning parameters in the database.
First we need to transfer the AOFFSET header to the database:
Database Edit Attribute Apply a Function...

12. Choose the abs function, and the OFFSET attribute. Type in
AOFFSET GEOMETRY for the result attribute and then select
OK.

Remember, if OFFSET is used, for every positive offset bin that is


defined, a negative offset bin is also created. For example, in split
spread shooting, the above example would contain DMO bins +220,
-220, +660, -660. In marine shooting where the first channel is
farthest from the boat, all of the offsets are negative, and only the
negative DMO bins would be populated.

13. For a QC that the function worked choose View Tabular...


AOFFSET and then OK. You can now use MB2 to drag OFFSET
from the DBTools window to the Tabular View Window. Close the
Tabular View when satisfied.

14. Permanently write AOFFSET to the database by selecting Database


Commit.

15. Now lets go into Database XDB Database Display. Be patient


the more data you put into the database, the longer the initial delay
when you first execute the database.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 14-9


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

16. Plot two 3D XYGraphs.

The first will be TRC: OFFSET, CDP, SRF and the second will be
TRC: AOFFSET, CDP, SRF. The XYGraph using AOFFSET will
look similar to the following:

Check the offset bin centers by looking at the graphs and verifying
that each offset bin is evenly populated with CDPs. Also determine
if it is appropriate to combine the traces by absolute offset or if the
negative offsets should be processed separately from the positive
offsets. A general rule is to simultaneously process like offsets.

Use the Grid tool to analyze your bins on the display. Select
Grid Display. This will generate new icons to rotate and move
the grid, modify the cell size, and generate spider or histogram plots

14-10 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

of the cells. Now select Grid Parameterise, and fill in the values
as displayed.

The dy should be the length of the line in CDPs. The dx should


be the offset bin spacing.

Click on the Green Light icon.You should have 15 offset bins


displayed. Click MB3 on the top left icon in XYGraph, and see how
your CDPs increment within each bin.

For this data, if OFFSET is used, with a bin increment of 440, the
near offset bin centers are -220 and +220, the far offset bin centers
are -3300 and +6380, and we have 23 bins. If AOFFSET is used, the
near offset bin center is 220, the far offset bin center is 6380, and we
have 15 offset bins.

Notice that the near offsets would only need a bin width of 220 ft.
for continuous CDP coverage, but the far offsets need a bin width of

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 14-11


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

440 ft. If you change dy to 1, ny to 215, and Y origin to 775


you will see a tight grid with a cell size of one CDP.

From this display you can zoom in and QC that each offset bin has
cells populated with continuous CDPs.

14-12 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

Assign DMO offset bins to the data


In this exercise you will offset bin the data using the Trace Binning
process, apply NMO in preparation for DMO, and QC the output
common offset ensembles.

1. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: 8.2-Assign DMO Offset Bins

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: --------------------------CDP-decon/refr/resid
Trace Read Option: ----------------------------------------------Sort
Interactive Data Access?: ---------------------------------------No
Select primary trace header entry: ------------CDP
Select secondary trace header entry: AOFFSET
Sort order for dataset: -------------------------------*:*/
Trace Binning
Header entry to bin: ------------------------------------AOFFSET
Binned header entry: -----------------------------------DMOOFF
Binned entry format: -------------------------------------------Real
Header entry bin centers: -------------------------------
---------------------- 110-1430(220),1760-6160(440)
Binned header entry values: --------------------------
---------------------- 110-1430(220),1760-6160(440)
Set OFFSET and AOFFSET headers to bin center: --Yes
Database/Header Transfer
Direction of transfer: --------------------------------------------------
-----------Load FROM Trace header TO database
Number of parameters: --------------------------------------------1
First database parameter: -----------------------------------------
---------------TRC:Geometry:New - Enter DMOOFF
First Header Entry: -------------------------------------DMOOFF
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: ---CDP-dmooff/input to DMO

2. In Disk Data Input, input the NMO corrected gathers with a


primary header entry of CDP and a secondary header entry of
AOFFSET.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 14-13


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

3. Enter the bin centers from 110 to 1430 with an increment of


220,and bin centers from 1760 to 6160 with an increment of 440
based on the absolute offset.

The discussion at the beginning of this section describes how to


calculate these numbers. Remember our primary goals are to have
the maximum number of bins, yet still have 100% CDP coverage. If
you wish you can vary the bin spacing more along the line.

Output the same values to a new header entry called DMOOFF.

If you plan to further process the DMO gathers, you may want to set
the OFFSET header word equal to DMOOFF values.

4. Transfer the DMOOFF header to the database by setting a new


database value DMOOFF (floating point).

5. Output the gathers to a new dataset CDP-dmooff/input to


DMO.

6. Execute the flow.

14-14 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

7. Now lets QC the DMO offset bin centers in the database. Select
Database XDB Database Display 3D XYGraph
TRC:AOFFSET,CDP,DMOOFF. You may have to use the mouse
button help on the bottom left of the window to help you locate
which database entry is DMOOFF, since its label will be an 8 digit
unix parsed name. When selected click Display.

8. From the XYGraph menu, select Color Edit. From the color
editor menu select File Open, and select the contrast.rgb color
file. Each DMO offset bin will now be displayed in a different
color.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 14-15


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

9. Edit the 8.1 flow to display the results of your DMO binning:

Editing Flow: 8.1- DMO Binning

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: --------------------CDP-dmooff/input to DMO
Trace Read Option: -------------------------------------------SORT
Interactive Data Access?: ---------------------------------------No
Select primary trace header entry: ----DMOOFF
Select secondary trace header entry: --------CDP
Sort order for dataset: ------------------------------ *:*/
Ensemble Stack/Combine
Type of operation: --------------------------------------Stack only
How are trace headers determined?: --Average
Secondary key bin size: -------------------------------1
Maximum traces per output ensemble: ------------------215
Warnings if max traces/ensemble exceeded?: --------Yes
Select PRIMARY Trace Order Header Word: ---DMOOFF
Average the X and Y coordinates of primary key?: ---No
Select SECONDARY Trace Order Header Word: -----CDP
Output trace secondary key order: --------------Ascending
Pad Traces
Header word to use for padding: --------------------------CDP
Spacing of header value: ------------------------------------------1
Remove traces?: ----------------------------------------------------No
Explicitly define the bounds of header values?: ------Yes
First trace header value: --------------------------------------775
Last trace header value: ---------------------------------------989
Trace Display
Primary trace LABELING header entry: ---------DMOOFF
Secondary trace LABELING header entry: ------------CDP

10. In Disk Data Input, input the gathers sorting on DMOOFF:CDP. In


Trace Display annotate DMOOFF and CDP.

The Ensemble Stack/Combine step should be used when DMOOFF


has been built from AOFFSET. It is used here to stack all like
numbered CDPs within the same offset panel.

14-16 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

Use pad traces to insert a dead trace whenever the spacing between
CDPs is greater that 1.

This display will show how many CDP traces exist per bin and will
also show any gaps or unpopulated CDPs in the offset plane.

11. Execute the flow.

12. Are the trace gaps in the DMO offset panels reasonable? If not you
will need to adjust you offset binning parameters and re-run flow
8.2.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 14-17


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

DMO

Both F-K and integral DMO methods are available in ProMAX.


Common Offset F-K DMO works in F-K space using the Stolt stretch
technique to account for vertical velocity variations. The data should be
binned into common offsets in preparation for this process. Ensemble
DMO in the T-X Domain is a Kirchhoff implementation, which can be
applied to arbitrary ensembles of input traces, such as common shot
gathers, common receiver gathers, or common offset data. This process
may be run in the shot mode for datasets with irregular shooting
geometries instead of the F-K DMO.

In a typical processing sequence, DMO follows statics and NMO. Since


DMO may enhance stacking velocity picks, try the following sequence.

NMO

DMO

Inverse NMO

Velocity
Analysis

Re-iterate this process until the difference between input and output
velocities in velocity analysis is small.

14-18 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

Apply DMO to the data.


1. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: 8.3-DMO

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: --------------------CDP-dmooff/input to DMO
Trace Read Option: ------------------------------------------SORT
Select primary trace header entry: ----DMOOFF
Select secondary trace header entry: --------CDP
Sort order for dataset: ------------------------------ *:*/
Common Offset F-K DMO
CDP interval: ------------------------------------------------------27.5
Typical common-offset trace spacing: -------------------27.5
Maximum number of CDPs in dataset: ------------------215
Maximum offset in data: ------------------------------------6600.
Header entry to use for offsets: ---------------------DMOOFF
Maximum frequency (in HZ): -----------------------------------80
Perform dip filtering?: -------------------------------------------Yes
Get RMS velocities from database?: -----------------------Yes
Select RMS velocity file: --vels from precompute
DMO stretch factor: -----------------------------------------------0.6
Maximum memory to use (in Mbytes): -----------------------4
Re-apply trace mutes?: -----------------------------------------Yes
Re-kill dead traces?: ---------------------------------------------Yes
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: -----------------------DMO-gathers
Disk Data Input
Select dataset: ---------------------------------------DMO-gathers
Trace Read Option: ------------------------------------------Get All
Trace Display

2. In Disk Data Input, input the gathers using DMOOFF as the


primary sort key and CDP as the secondary key.

3. Select Common Offset F-K DMO parameters.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 14-19


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

Input the same velocity field used to NMO correct the input gathers.

4. In Disk Data Output, output the DMO applied data.

5. In Trace Display, label DMOOFF and CDP.

6. Execute the flow, and view the common offset planes after DMO.

7. After viewing a few of the offset planes after DMO, select


File Exit/Continue Flow. Remember to select the continue flow
option, otherwise the job will stop without outputting the entire
dataset.

8. Optional: After the DMO job finishes, build a flow that sorts the
data to CDP and views the gathers.

Toggle off the first three processes in the above flow. Change the sort
to CDP in Disk Data Input, change the Trace Display ensembles per
screen to 215 and execute.

In a typical processing sequence you would apply inverse NMO and


repick velocities.

14-20 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

Final Stack
1. Build the next flow to stack results.

Editing Flow: 8.4-DMO Stack

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: ---------------------------------------DMO-gathers
Trace Read Option: -------------------------------------------SORT
Interactive Data Access?: ---------------------------------------No
Select primary trace header entry: ------------CDP
Sort order for dataset: ---------------------------------*/
CDP/Ensemble Stack
----Default all parameters----
Trace Display Label
Trace label: ----------------------------------------------DMO Stack
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: ----------------------------STK-dmo
Trace Display
Primary trace LABELING header entry: ---------------None
Secondary trace LABELING header entry: ------------CDP

2. In Disk Data Input, input your DMO data in CDP sort order.

3. Select an output dataset name.

4. Execute the flow, and examine the stack.

If you notice any large artifacts from the DMO process, it probably
resulted from a bad trace. You could either go back and kill the bad
trace, or apply an AGC prior to DMO.

5. Use your flow 11-Compare Stacks to examine the differences


between the DMO stack, and the regular stack.

6. Optional: Replace Common Offset F-K DMO with Ensemble


DMO in the T-X Domain. Build and execute a flow to compare the
output gathers and stacks. Ensemble DMO in T-X Domain process
will output as many traces per CDP per bin as were input by
producing copies of the output traces.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 14-21


Chapter 14: Dip Moveout (DMO)

Chapter Summary

Upon completion of this chapter you should be able to answer the


following questions:

Can you Common Offset Bin data for input to DMO

Are you familiar with the input parameters to DMO

Do you understand the basic theory of DMO

14-22 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 15
Poststack Signal Enhancement
ProMAX offers a variety of poststack signal enhancement tools including eigenvector filtering,
trace mixing, F-K and bandpass filtering. You can use these processes in conjunction with
windowed processing to limit the signal enhancement processing over a specific time window.

In this chapter we will cover F-X Decon and Dynamic S/N Filtering as well as techniques to
subtract adjacent traces (Trace Math) and to add back (BLEND) a proportion of the original data
to the processed data.

Topics covered in this chapter:

F-X Decon, Dynamic S/N Filtering, and BLEND


Trace Math

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 15-1


Chapter 15: Poststack Signal Enhancement

Chapter Objectives

9. PostStack Signal Enhancement

To further clean up and optimize the stack, some type of poststack signal
enhancement is almost always applied. This chapter explores some of
ProMAXs techniques of reducing noise and enhancing signal in
poststack data. Upon completion of this chapter you should:

Be familiar with F-X Decon and Dynamic S/N Filtering techniques

Understand how to use Trace Math to enhance stacks

15-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 15: Poststack Signal Enhancement

F-X Decon, Dynamic S/N Filtering, and BLEND

F-X Decon is a tool designed to attenuate random noise on your stack.


This process transforms data from time and distance to frequency and
distance. Each sample in the transformed data has both real and
imaginary components. Events with similar dip appear as complex
sinusoids along a given frequency slice. Therefore, the signal is
predictable. F-X deconvolution uses a complex prediction filter to
predict the signal one trace ahead, across the frequency slice. Any
difference between the predicted waveform and the actual waveform is
considered noise and removed.

Similar to F-X Decon, Dynamic S/N (Signal to Noise) Filtering


transforms the data into frequency and distance and calculates noise in
the same manner as described above. However, Dynamic S/N Filtering
applies an amplitude only convolutional filter to each trace based on the
signal to noise ratio. Therefore, unlike F-X Decon, there is little mixing
or lateral smearing of data.

BLEND is a tool which is useful for attenuating the effects of a given


process by adding or subtracting a chosen ratio of input data to the
processed data.

Signal Enhancement
In this exercise, you will compare the results of your residual statics
stack, with stacks that are processed with signal enhancement
techniques.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 15-3


Chapter 15: Poststack Signal Enhancement

1. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: 9.1-Poststack Enhancement

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: ---------------------------------------------STK-dmo
Reproduce Traces
Trace grouping to reproduce: --------------------------All Data
Total Number of datasets: ----------------------------------------4
IF
Trace Display Label
Trace label: ------------------------------------------Original Input
ELSEIF
SPECIFY trace list: ---------------------------------------------------2
Trace Display Label
Trace label: -------------------------------------------------FX Decon
F-X Decon
TYPE of filter: ------------------------------------Wiener Levinson
Percentage of white noise: ---------------------------------------0.
Horizontal window length: -------------------------------------50
Number of filter samples: -----------------------------------------5
Time window length: -----------------------------------------1000
Time window overlap: ------------------------------------------100
F-X filter start frequency: -----------------------------------------3
F-X filter end frequency: -----------------------------------------90
Re-apply trace mute after filter?: ---------------------------Yes
ELSEIF
Trace Display Label
BLEND
F-X Decon
ELSEIF
Trace Display Label
Dynamic S/N Filtering
ENDIF
Disk Data Output
Automatic Gain Control
Trace Display

15-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 15: Poststack Signal Enhancement

Editing Flow: 9.1-Poststack Enhancement

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Reproduce Traces
IF
Trace Display Label
ELSEIF
Trace Display Label
F-X Decon
ELSEIF
SPECIFY trace list: ---------------------------------------------------3
Trace Display Label
Trace label: --------------------------------------FX Decon/Blend
BLEND
Ratio of processed/original: ----------------------------------1:2
F-X Decon
----Use same parameters as the previous F-X Decon----
ELSEIF
SPECIFY trace list: ---------------------------------------------------4
Trace Display Label
Trace label: ------------------------------Dynamic S/N Filtering
Dynamic S/N Filtering
Horizontal window length: -------------------------------------20
Time window length: -----------------------------------------1000
Time window overlap: ------------------------------------------100
F-X filter start frequency: -----------------------------------------3
F-X filter end frequency: -----------------------------------------90
Re-apply trace mute after filter?: ---------------------------Yes
ENDIF
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: -----STK-signal enhancement
Automatic Gain Control
----Default all parameters----
Trace Display
Primary trace LABELING header entry: ---------------None
Secondary trace LABELING header entry: ------------CDP

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 15-5


Chapter 15: Poststack Signal Enhancement

2. In Disk Data Input, input your residual statics stack.

3. Make four copies of your stack with Reproduce traces and choose a
trace grouping of All Data.

4. Set up an IF-ELSEIF-ENDIF conditional with Trace Display


Labels to easily compare the results of the different signal
enhancement tools with your original stack.

Enter the Repeat number to pass through this portion of the flow.
Please refer to the chapter on parameter analysis if you are not
familiar with the IF-ENDIF conditional logic.

5. Select F-X Decon and Dynamic S/N Filtering parameters.

Refer to the online helpfiles for parameter selection of these


processes. Note that the BLEND function applies to the process
immediately following.

6. Output the four copies of the dataset with Disk Data Output. This
dataset will be used in the next flow.

7. Execute the flow.

View the 2D filtered data, and compare the stacks using the
animation tool. Which dataset looks the most mixed?

15-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 15: Poststack Signal Enhancement

Trace Math

Trace Math will allow you to add, subtract, multiply or divide adjacent
traces, or apply a scalar to the traces. We will use this process to subtract
stacks created using different processing techniques.

Use Trace Math to view differences between stacks


1. Create the following flow:

Editing Flow: 9.2-Trace Math

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: ---------------------STK-signal enhancement
Trace Read Option: ----------------------------------------------Sort
Select primary trace header entry: ------------CDP
Select secondary trace header entry: --REPEAT
Sort order for dataset: ---------------------------*:2,1/
Trace Math
MODE of operation: ---------------------------------Trace/Trace
TYPE of trace/trace operation: ------------Subtract Traces
Honor ensemble boundaries: ----------------------------------No
Trace Display Label
Trace label: --------------------------------------FX Decon - Input
Trace Display
Primary trace LABELING header entry: ---------------None
Secondary trace LABELING header entry: ------------CDP

2. In Disk Data Input, input the file you just created, and select the FX
Decon copy, and the Original Input copy.

3. In Trace Math, select Trace/Trace for the mode of operation, and


Subtract Traces.

4. In Trace Display Label, indicate which stacks have been subtracted.

5. Execute the flow.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 15-7


Chapter 15: Poststack Signal Enhancement

A display representing the difference between the two stacks


appears on your screen. Ideally all of the energy in this difference
display would be noise that was removed by the FX Decon. The
presence of actual signal in this display might indicate a need to try
different parameters in the FX Decon.

6. Experiment with the different trace scaling methods from within


Trace Display.

15-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 15: Poststack Signal Enhancement

Chapter Summary

Upon completion of this chapter you should be able to answer the


following questions:

Are you comfortable with F-X Decon and Dynamic S/N Filtering

Are you comfortable with Trace Math

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 15-9


Chapter 15: Poststack Signal Enhancement

15-10 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 16
Velocity: QC, Editing, Modeling
Preparation of your velocity field for migration is a crucial step in the imaging process. You may
need to smooth the field in space and/or time and change the field type from a stacking (RMS)
field to an interval velocity field. You will also need to convert your velocities from the floating
processing datum to the final flat datum.

Manipulation of velocity fields is necessary for other purposes such as seismic trace inversion,
finite difference modeling and time to depth conversion.

In this chapter, we will discuss how to edit and modify velocity fields, using two different velocity
tools.

Topics covered in this chapter:

Velocity Viewer/Point Editor


Velocity Manipulation

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 16-1


Chapter 16: Velocity: QC, Editing, Modeling

Chapter Objectives

10. PostStack Migration Velocity Modeling

Preparation of your velocity field for migration is a crucial step in the


imaging process. You may need to smooth the field in space and/or time
and change the field type from a stacking (RMS) field to an interval
velocity field. You will also need to convert your velocities from the
floating processing datum to the final flat datum. In this chapter, we will
discuss how to edit and modify velocity fields, using two different
velocity tools. Upon completion of this chapter you should:

Be able to use the Velocity Viewer/Point Editor

Be able to Manipulate the Velocities to various formats

16-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 16: Velocity: QC, Editing, Modeling

Velocity Viewer/Point Editor

Velocity Viewer/Point Editor is a stand-alone module, enabling you to


scan through a velocity field, identify and edit velocity control points,
and analyze the interpolation between the control points. This tool also
lets you smooth the velocity field and convert stacking velocities to
interval velocities.

A typical use of this tool is to analyze velocities for anomalous points


that need editing. In particular, unrealistic velocities are frequently
computed when converting stacking velocities to interval velocities.
This tool ensures that a reasonable velocity field is passed to the
migration.

Smooth RMS velocities, and convert to interval velocity


In this exercise, you will edit and smooth a velocity field that was
created with the Velocity Analysis tool. You will then convert the RMS
velocities to interval velocities in time. These edited velocity fields will
be used in the chapter on migrations later in the manual. Remember that
FK Migrations need Vrms(t,x), Phase Shift Migrations need Vint(t), and
Finite Difference Migrations need Vint(t,x).

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 16-3


Chapter 16: Velocity: QC, Editing, Modeling

1. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: 10.1-Velocity Editing

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Velocity Viewer/Point Editor*


Select the type of field you wish to edit: ----------------------
-----------------------------------Stacking (RMS) Velocity
Do you wish to edit an existing table?: -------------------Yes
Select input velocity database entry: ---------------
--------------------------------------vels from precompute
Do you wish to specify the bounds of the field?: ------No
Select output velocity database entry: -------------------------
---------------------------------------Smoothed for FK Mig
Specify an alternative name for the output interval
velocity?: -------------------------------------------------Yes
Select output Interval velocity database entry: -
----------------------------------Converted Stacking Vels
Minimum depth (or time) of velocity field to edit: --------0.
Maximum depth (or time) of velocity field to edit: --------0

2. Select Velocity Viewer/Point Editor parameters. Select Stacking


(RMS) Velocity field as the type of field to edit.

Select an output name of Smoothed for FK Mig for the RMS


velocities and Converted Stacking Vels for the interval
velocities.

3. Execute the flow.

16-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 16: Velocity: QC, Editing, Modeling

Edit
Edit Vel
Function

Function Function to Interval


to Edit(Pink) Compare(Blue) Velocity

4. Edit velocity control points.

To edit the velocity field, you must edit the control points that define
the velocity. A velocity control point generally consists of a vertical
group (or function) of velocity-time pairs at a certain CDP location.
To view these control points, click on the Edit Vel Function icon
and move your mouse into the velocity field.

Move the mouse pointer from location to location and watch as the
blue function changes in the edit window. You will also notice that
the function nearest the mouse pointer changes from a solid line to a
dashed line. Click MB2 near one of the locations to freeze the
function in the edit window; the function does not change as the
mouse moves across the velocity locations.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 16-5


Chapter 16: Velocity: QC, Editing, Modeling

Click MB1 near a different velocity location. You should now have
a blue line and a pink line in the edit window. Click the Edit icon on
the right of the edit window, and follow the mouse button help to edit
the pink function. After editing, the velocity field can be updated by
clicking on the Update button on the top of the edit window.

5. Once your velocity field has been edited to your satisfaction, apply
a general smoothing. From the menu bar select Modify Smooth
Velocity field. This brings up the Smoothing Parameters window.

Smoothing Parameter window

6. Enter the smoothing parameters as indicated above, and select OK.


Examine the results of the smoothing process. If you want to undo
the smoothing and try again with different parameters, select
Modify Undo last change, then re-smooth the velocities.

7. Once your velocity field is sufficiently smooth, select File Save


table to disk. This saves the Smoothed for FK MIg file to disk
for use in the FK Migration.

16-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 16: Velocity: QC, Editing, Modeling

8. After you have saved your smoothed velocity field, you may
compute and display Interval Velocities by selecting Modify
Convert RMS to Interval Velocity Smoothed gradients Dix
equation.

If there are large anomalies in the interval velocity field, you may
need to select Modify Undo last change, perform more editing
on the RMS field, and then convert to interval velocities again. You
can also directly edit and smooth this interval velocity field in the
same manner as described above for the RMS velocities.

9. Once you are satisfied with your interval velocity field, select
File Save table to disk and exit. This will save the Converted
Stacking Vels file to disk for use in the FD Migration.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 16-7


Chapter 16: Velocity: QC, Editing, Modeling

Velocity Manipulation

Velocity Manipulation is used to convert one type of velocity to another,


datumize velocities, apply a percentage, and/or smooth velocities. In
this section, you will output three new velocity functions. The new
functions will be a RMS field shifted to final datum, an interval velocity
field shifted to final datum, and a single average interval velocity
function shifted to final datum.

Shift smoothed RMS velocities to final datum


In this exercise, you will shift your smoothed RMS velocity field to final
datum for later use in F-K migration.

16-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 16: Velocity: QC, Editing, Modeling

1. Edit your flow:

Editing Flow: 10.1-Velocity Editing

Add Delete Execute View Exit

>Velocity Viewer/Point Editor*<


Velocity Manipulation*
Type of velocity table to input:--Stacking (RMS) Velocity
Get velocity table from database?: -------------------------Yes
Select input velocity database entry: ---------------
---------------------------------------Smoothed for FK Mig
Combine a second velocity table with the first?: -------No
Resample the input velocity table(s): -----------------------No
Shift or stretch the input velocity table?: ------------------No
Adjust velocities to the final datum?: ---------------------Yes
Maximum percentage to change velocities during
datuming: --------------------------------------------------30
Type of parameter table to output:-------------------------------
----------------------------------Stacking (RMS) Velocity
Select output velocity database entry: -------------
------------------------Smoothed at datum for FK Mig
Spatially resample the velocity table?:---------------------No
Output a single average velocity table?: ------------------No
Smooth velocity field?: -------------------------------------------No
Vertically resample the output velocity table?: ---------No
Adjust output velocities by percentages?: ----------------No

2. Select Stacking (RMS) velocity for both the input and output types.

Select your smoothed velocity field as input, and assign a output


name.

3. Select Yes to Adjust velocities to the final datum?

4. Execute the flow.

Once you have created the new velocity table, you could QC the file
by inputting the field into the Velocity Viewer/Point Editor.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 16-9


Chapter 16: Velocity: QC, Editing, Modeling

Shift interval velocities to final datum


In this exercise, you will shift your interval velocities to final datum for
later input to FD migration.

1. Edit your flow to output interval velocities at final datum:

Editing Flow: 10.1-Velocity Editing

Add Delete Execute View Exit

>Velocity Viewer/Point Editor*<


Velocity Manipulation*
Type of velocity table to input:--Interval Velocity in time
Get velocity table from database?: -------------------------Yes
Select input velocity database entry: ---------------
----------------------------------Converted Stacking Vels
Combine a second velocity table with the first?: -------No
Resample the input velocity table(s): -----------------------No
Shift or stretch the input velocity table?: ------------------No
Adjust velocities to the final datum?: ---------------------Yes
Type of parameter table to output:-------------------------------
-----------------------------------Interval Velocity in time
Select output velocity database entry: -------------
---------------------Converted vels at datum/FD Mig
Spatially resample the velocity table?:---------------------No
Output a single average velocity table?: ------------------No
Smooth velocity field?: -------------------------------------------No
Vertically resample the output velocity table?: ---------No
Adjust output velocities by percentages?: ----------------No

2. Select Interval Velocity in time as the input and output table types.

Read in your interval velocity file, and assign an output file name.

3. Select Yes to Adjust velocities to final datum?

4. Execute the flow.

Once you have created the new velocity table, you could QC the file
by inputting the field into the Velocity Viewer/Point Editor.

16-10 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 16: Velocity: QC, Editing, Modeling

Output a single interval velocity function


In this exercise you will output a single interval velocity function in time
to be used in Phase Shift migration.

1. Edit your flow to output a single average function:

Editing Flow: 10.1-Velocity Editing

Add Delete Execute View Exit

>Velocity Viewer/Point Editor*<


Velocity Manipulation*
Type of velocity table to input:--Interval Velocity in time
Get velocity table from database?: -------------------------Yes
Select input velocity database entry: ---------------
---------------------Converted vels at datum/FD Mig
Combine a second velocity table with the first?: -------No
Resample the input velocity table(s): -----------------------No
Shift or stretch the input velocity table?: ------------------No
Adjust velocities to the final datum?: ----------------------No
Type of parameter table to output:-------------------------------
-----------------------------------Interval Velocity in time
Select output velocity database entry: -------------
------------------------One Function at datum/PS Mig
Spatially resample the velocity table?:---------------------No
Output a single average velocity table?: -----------------Yes
Smooth velocity field?: -------------------------------------------No
Time step sizes for the output velocity table: ------------30
Adjust output velocities by percentages?: ----------------No

2. Select Interval Velocity in time as the input and output table types.

Read in your interval velocities at final datum, and assign an output


filename.

3. Select No to Adjust velocities to final datum?, and select Yes to


Output a single average velocity table?

4. Execute the flow.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 16-11


Chapter 16: Velocity: QC, Editing, Modeling

Chapter Summary

Upon completion of this chapter you should be able to answer the


following questions:

Are you comfortable with the Velocity Viewer/Point Editor

Can you Manipulate the Velocities to various formats

16-12 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 17
PostStack Migration
The ProMAX suite of 2D migration tools includes pre and poststack time and depth migration and
migration velocity analysis. The available poststack migrations are of the F-K, Finite Difference,
Reverse Time, Phase Shift, and Kirchhoff types. The goal is to migrate the stack section with the
most appropriate poststack migration process. To aid in this selection, this chapter includes a brief
description of the processes. The Reference Manual and cited references give further detail.

Topics covered in this chapter:

Poststack Migration Processes


Tapering
Poststack migration using:
FK migration
Phase Shift migration
FD migration

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 17-1


Chapter 17: PostStack Migration

Chapter Objectives

10. PostStack Migration Velocity Modeling

The ProMAX suite of 2D migration tools includes pre and poststack


time and depth migration and migration velocity analysis. The goal here
is to migrate the stack section with the most appropriate poststack
migration process. To aid in this selection, this chapter includes a brief
description of the processes. Upon completion of this chapter you
should:

Understand Tapering and other Migration Parameters

Be familiar with running FK, Phase Shift, and FD Migrations

17-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 17: PostStack Migration

PostStack Migration Processes

Choosing a poststack migration process can be difficult. You must


weigh CPU time, accuracy of velocity structure, steepness of imaging
dip, and other factors, in order to choose the most appropriate process.
Often, a number of different migrations must be run in order to compare
results. To help you decide on the optimal migration for a given
situation, the following is a summary of the poststack migrations and
how they handle changes in velocity and dip:

PostStack Migrations
Migration Name Category Type Velocity V(x) V(t/z) Steep Rel
Dip Times

Memory Stolt F-K F-K Time VRMS(x,t) Poor Poor Fair 0.2

Phase Shift Phase Shift Time VINT(t) None Good Good 1.0

Fast Explicit FD Time FD Time VINT(x,t) Fair Good Fair 9.6

Steep Dip Explicit FD FD (70 deg) Time VINT(x,t) Fair Good Good 21.0
Time FD (50 deg) Time VINT(x,t) Fair Good Fair 10.0

Kirchhoff Time Kirchhoff Time VRMS(x,t) Fair Good Good 14.6

Reverse Time T-K Reverse Time Time VINT(t) None Good Good 2.5

Explicit FD Depth FD Depth VINT(x,z) Good Good Good 21.7

Kirchhoff Depth Imp.Eikonal Depth VINT(x,z) Fair Good Good 7.3


Max.Amp. Depth VINT(x,z) Good Good Good 12.0
Mult. Arr. Depth VINT(x,z) Excel. Excel. Excel. 64.0

NOTE:

These tests were run on an IBM 370 RS6000 system. Your times will depend on
your specific environment, workload, dataset, and processing parameters.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 17-3


Chapter 17: PostStack Migration

Tapering

Tapering is automatically applied to samples at the bottom and edges of


the seismic section prior to migration. This prevents migration artifacts
due to the abrupt truncation at the bottom of the input section (see
diagram below). The magnitude of the edge taper should normally
increase with depth, as migration artifacts originating deeper in the
section tend to move a longer distance.

Upper edge
taper default is 2 traces

Bottom
taper default is 200ms
Lower edge
taper default is 20 traces

A Hamming taper is used, which consists of a cosine weighting that


varies from 100% to 8% over the length of the horizontal taper. The
bottom taper goes from 100% to 0%.

In the migration processes, there is a parameter that asks if you want to


change the default tapering. This does not turn off the taper, instead, it
allows you the change the tapering values. If you have steeply dipping
events near the edge of your data you may want to pad traces rather than
the taper the edges.

17-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 17: PostStack Migration

Poststack Migration

At this point, you should have your best stacked dataset with statics and
velocities applied, a pre-processed input velocity parameter table
(edited, smoothed, shifted to datum), and an idea of the types of
migrations you would like to run.

Apply FK migration
In this exercise, you will run a FK migration on your data.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 17-5


Chapter 17: PostStack Migration

1. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: 10.2-FK Migration

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: -------------------------------------------------STK-dmo
Memory Stolt F-K Migration
Minimum CDP to migrate: ------------------------------------------775
Maximum CDP to migrate: -----------------------------------------989
CDP interval (ft or meters): ---------------------------------------27.5
Maximum frequency to migrate (in Hz): ------------------------80
Get RMS velocities from database?: ----------------------------Yes
Select velocity file: -Smoothed at datum for FK Mig
Number of traces to smooth velocity field over: ---------------0
Percent velocity scale factor: ---------------------------------------95
Stolt stretch factor: ----------------------------------------------------0.6
Apply Stolt obliquity correction?: --------------------------------Yes
Change maximum memory usage?: -----------------------------No
Change the default tapering?: -------------------------------------No
Re-apply trace mutes?: ----------------------------------------------Yes
Re-kill dead traces?: --------------------------------------------------Yes
Trace Display Label
Trace label: -------------------------------------------------FK Migration
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: -------------------------------MIG-fk mig
Bandpass Filter
Ormsby filter frequency values: --------------------- 5-10-60-70
Automatic Gain Control
----Default all parameters----
Trace Display
Primary trace LABELING header entry: ------------------NONE
Secondary trace LABELING header entry: -----------------CDP

2. In Disk Data Input, input your best (DMO) stack dataset.

17-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 17: PostStack Migration

3. Set FK migration parameters.

Select your smoothed velocity field at final datum.

Set the velocity scaling factor. Normal ranges are 85-100 percent.

4. Execute the flow.

5. After examining your migration in Trace Display, select


File Exit/Continue flow.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 17-7


Chapter 17: PostStack Migration

Apply Phase Shift Migration


1. Copy your previous flow, and add Phase Shift Migration:

Editing Flow: 10.3-Phase Shift Migration

Add Delete Execute View

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: ----------------------------------------------------STK-dmo
Phase Shift Migration
Minimum CDP to migrate: --------------------------------------------775
Maximum CDP to migrate: --------------------------------------------989
CDP interval (ft or meters): ------------------------------------------27.5
Minimum frequency to migrate (in Hz): ------------------------------0
Maximum frequency to migrate (in Hz): ---------------------------80
Get INTERVAL-velocity-versus-time function from
database?: -----------------------------------------------------Yes
Select velocity file: ---One Function at datum/PS Mig
Percent velocity scale factor: ------------------------------------------95
Migrate dips: -------------------------up to and beyond 90 degrees
Maximum amount of memory (in Mbytes): -----------------------16
Change the default tapering?: ----------------------------------------No
Re-apply trace mutes?: -------------------------------------------------Yes
Re-kill dead traces?: ----------------------------------------------------Yes
Trace Display Label
Trace label: ----------------------------------------------------PS Migration
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: ---------------------------------MIG-ps mig
Bandpass Filter
Ormsby filter frequency values: ------------------------ 5-10-60-70
Automatic Gain Control
----Default all parameters----
Trace Display
Primary trace LABELING header entry: ---------------------NONE
Secondary trace LABELING header entry: --------------------CDP

2. In Disk Data Input, input your best (DMO) stack dataset.

3. Select Phase Shift migration parameters.

17-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 17: PostStack Migration

Select your smoothed velocity field at final datum.

Set the velocity scaling factor. Normal ranges are 85-100 percent.

4. Execute the flow.

5. After examining your migration in Trace Display, select


File Exit/Continue flow.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 17-9


Chapter 17: PostStack Migration

Apply FD Migration
1. Copy your previous flow, and add FD Migration:

Editing Flow: 10.4-FD Migration

Add Delete Execute View

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: ----------------------------------------------------STK-dmo
Fast Explicit FD Time Mig.
CDP interval (ft or meters): ------------------------------------------27.5
Maximum frequency (in Hz): -------------------------------------------80
Time step for migration diffraction term: ---------------------------0
Percent to pad trace length: --------------------------------------------30
Get interval velocities from database?: --------------------------Yes
Select interval vs. time velocity file: ------------------------
----------------------------Converted vels at datum/FD Mig
Change paneling parameters?: --------------------------------------No
Change the default tapering?: ----------------------------------------No
Retain input sample rate?: --------------------------------------------Yes
Re-apply trace mutes?: -------------------------------------------------Yes
Re-kill dead traces?: ----------------------------------------------------Yes
Trace Display Label
Trace label: ---------------------------------------------------FD Migration
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: ---------------------------------MIG-fd mig
Bandpass Filter
Ormsby filter frequency values: ------------------------ 5-10-60-70
Automatic Gain Control
----Default all parameters----
Trace Display
Primary trace LABELING header entry: ---------------------NONE
Secondary trace LABELING header entry: --------------------CDP

2. In Disk Data Input, input your best (DMO) stack dataset.

17-10 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Chapter 17: PostStack Migration

3. Select FD migration parameters.

Select your interval velocity field at final datum.

Choose to retain input sample rate.

4. Execute the flow.

5. After examining your migration in Trace Display, select


File Exit/Continue flow.

Compare Migrations
1. Use your previous flow 5.3-Compare Stacks, to compare the
various migration datasets to the input stack.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 17-11


Chapter 17: PostStack Migration

Chapter Summary

Upon completion of this chapter you should be able to answer the


following questions:

Do you understand Tapering and other Migration Parameters

Are you comfortable running FK, Phase Shift, and FD Migrations

17-12 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Appendix 1
Additional Geometry Information
This chapter contains appendix additional information on the geometry assignment processes.

Topics covered in this chapter:

Geometry Core Path Overview


Details of the Geometry Programs
Pre-Geometry Database Initialization
Inline Geometry Header Load after Pre-Initialization

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-1


Appendix 1: Additional Geometry Information

Geometry Core Path Overview

How to Decide on the Primary Geometry Path


Vector Diagram
OPTIONS QUESTIONS

* Pre-Initialization
no * Does Shot and Receiver X, Y, and
station information exist in the
yes headers and do you want to use it?
no
* Full Extraction
no
* Do you want to minimize the
number of times that you have to
yes read the data?
* From Field Notes and Survey
no
yes * Do I have Valid Trace Numbers?

Table Diagram

Question Answer Option

Is shot and receiver station, Yes Full Extraction


and x,y information in the
headers; do you want to use
it? No Ask the next question

Do you want to minimize the Yes From Field Notes and Survey
number of times to read the
data?
No Partial Extraction

1-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Appendix 1: Additional Geometry Information

Transferring the Database to Trace Headers


When the database is completed, the information contained in it is
transferred to trace headers. The following question determines how to
match a trace in the data file to a trace in the database:

Question Answer Option

Was a Full or Partial No Inline Geom Header Load by


Extraction used to create the Chan and other trace header
database and a new output file words.
written?

Inline Geom Header Load by


Yes valid trace number.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-3


Appendix 1: Additional Geometry Information

Details of the Geometry Programs

In this section we will look in detail at the functions performed by the


main programs used in the geometry assignment process. The specific
processes that will be addressed are:

Inline Geom Header Load

Extract Database Files

Geometry Header Preparation

Inline Geom Header Load is the main program used to assign geometry
values to individual trace headers from the OPF database files. One of
the main issues related to this geometry assignment procedure is to
define how a trace in a data file will be identified in the Trace Ordered
Parameter file. One of the options is to use a specific trace header word
called the "valid trace number". In order to utilize the "valid trace
number" we will have to spend some time discussing its origin and how
it can be used.

Another program that may be used in the geometry assignment


procedure is called Extract Database Files. We will see that this program
is one of the ways that the "valid trace number" can be generated by
running it in either the Partial or Full extraction modes.

Geometry Header Preparation is another program that may be selected


in the geometry assignment procedures. This program can be used for a
variety of different purposes. We will look specifically at how it can be
used when dealing with the problem of duplicate Field File
Identification Numbers.

Steps Performed by Inline Geom Header Load


Inline Geom Header Load is the program that populates the trace
headers of an input data file with the geometry information stored
in the database.

The outcome from running this program is to have a database and a


data file that "match".

1-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Appendix 1: Additional Geometry Information

This means that every trace in the output data file exists in the
database and there is a one to one correspondence in all values in
the trace header to those in the database.

After a successful run each trace will also be assigned the "valid
trace number" if it was not pre-assigned using Extract Database
Files.

There are two major options in this program pertaining to how to


identify a trace in the input data file with a trace in the database. These
options are:

1. to read the "valid trace number" from the input trace header, or

2. to read the recording channel number (automatic) and 1 or 2 trace


header words that can uniquely identify this trace as having
originated from a unique shot (SIN) that exists in the shot database.

Once a trace in a data file has been identified in the Trace OPF, the
information in all of the OPFs for that trace is copied to the trace
header.

Valid Trace Numbers


Before we proceed, lets make sure that we understand the idea of the
"valid trace number".

Understanding this will help us decide on the "best" course of


action for our data.

The "valid trace number" is simply a ProMAX trace header word.


Every trace in the database is numbered from 1 to N, where N is the
total number of individual traces in the database.

This is a unique number for each trace in the line or 3D project.

A "valid trace number" combined with matching geometry is a flag


that will allow fast random access sorting of disk datasets.

Every trace in the TRC database is assigned to a single SIN (shot),


SRF (receiver) and CDP. Every trace has an individual Shot to
Receiver Offset distance, an individual midpoint X and Y location
and many other values that are single numbers, that may, or may not
be different for every trace.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-5


Appendix 1: Additional Geometry Information

Inline Geom Header Load matches the current trace being


processed to the database and then copies all of the trace dependent
values as well as the other order values to the trace header. The last
thing that happens is that the traces are "stamped" as matching the
database.

Valid Trace Number Origin


Where does the "valid trace number" trace header word come from?
Luckily, the answer to this is very simple.

The Extract Database Files program writes this trace header word
after it reads and counts a trace that it is entering into the TRC
database. In this case the "valid trace number" is pre-assigned.

If it is not pre-assigned, the Inline Geom Header Load process will


create it after it determines which trace in the database corresponds
to a trace in a data file.

The "valid trace number" is a unique number for every trace and is
stored in the trace header as TRACE_NO.

This trace header word continues to exist ONLY if you write a new trace
file after the extraction procedure.

A common question that arises concerns the decision to pre-assign the


"valid trace number" using Extract Database Files or to rely on the
alternate header identification on the first read of the input data. You
may consider using Extract Database Files if there is sufficient
information in the trace headers that can be transferred to the database
which will save time and increase accuracy of the geometry definition
process. The extraction may be run in either the partial extraction or full
extraction modes depending on what information is available in the
trace headers of the input data.

Steps Performed By Extraction


The steps performed by the extraction options are:

Pre-Geometry Initialization (or partial extraction) which is sometimes


used when no receiver information exists in the incoming headers.

Partial Extraction counts each of the following:

the number of traces encountered

1-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Appendix 1: Additional Geometry Information

the number of shots encountered


the number of traces per shot
and then

writes the trace count number and SIN to the trace header

Full Extraction is used when you want to extract the shot and receiver
location and coordinate information from the incoming headers.

Full Extraction counts each of the following:

the number of traces encountered


the number of shots encountered
the number of traces per shot
the number of receivers encountered
the number of traces per receiver
and then

writes the trace count number and SIN to the trace header

IF you have run the extraction in either mode, AND written a new trace
data file, AND have not altered the number of traces in the database, you
now have valid trace numbers in the headers of the output data set
which you can use to map a trace in a data file to a trace in the database.

This mapping will be performed by Inline Geom Header Load after the
database is completed.

Between Extraction and Geom Load


After running Extract Database Files in either mode there are many
steps that need to be completed prior to running the Inline Geom Header
Load.

The extraction only partially populates the database. More work will
generally need to be done in the Spreadsheets to input the remaining
information.

After the Spreadsheets are complete, the next step would be to complete
the CDP binning procedures and then finalize the database.

With the database complete, you can continue with the next step of
loading the geometry information from the databases to the trace
headers. You may elect to address a trace by its "valid trace number"

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-7


Appendix 1: Additional Geometry Information

assigned during the extraction or you may read a combination of trace


headers to identify the trace.

Geometry Load Procedures


For the first option, Inline Geom Header Load operates as follows:

1) it identifies the TRACE_NO of the incoming trace and finds that trace
in the TRC database.

2) it copies the appropriate TRC order values to the trace header and
then

3) finds the shot, receiver, cdp, inline, crossline, and offset bin for that
trace. The appropriate values from those orders are then copied to the
trace headers as well.

In the second option, Inline Geom Header Load does not know exactly
which TRACE_NO it is looking for. It does know which channel and
shot to look for based on the header word(s) that you selected. Given
that this mapping is unique, the program now knows which SIN and
CHAN to look for in the TRC database. Once the entry is found, the
TRACE_NO is copied to the headers and the steps outlined in the first
option are performed.

Again, the key to the second option is that you need to identify which
shot a trace came from by a "unique" combination of header words for
that shot.

1-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Appendix 1: Additional Geometry Information

Pre Geometry Database Initialization

Note: In general, this process is not recommended for medium to large


volume 3D projects.

To create a minimum set of entries in the SIN and TRC Ordered


Parameter files, based upon the information found in the trace headers
of the data passed through the flow, selecting Yes to the option for Pre-
Geometry Extraction. Basically this process counts how many traces,
different FFIDs, and recording channels were present for each input
FFID. Therefore, it can build the TRC and SIN ordered database files.
An SRF OPF could be created, and may or may not have any
information in it.

Partial Extraction Flow Chart

Disk Output - Pre-Init Path


O.B. UKOOA ASCII Field
Notes Data

UKOOA SEG-? Input


Import Spreadsheet
Manual
Input Import
Database
Import Seismic Data
Extract (ProMAX)
Database
Geometry Files
Spreadsheet
Builds TRC and SIN
Ordered Parameter OPFs only Disk Data
Pre Geom Init = yes Output
Files

Marine Data Inline Geom


SSD correction Header Load Valid Trace
Numbers
Overwrite Seismic Data
Seismic Data Trace Headers
(ProMAX)
(ProMAX)

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-9


Appendix 1: Additional Geometry Information

This option may be appropriate for relatively small datasets which only
have FFID and CHAN in the input trace headers. This option should be
used when reading the field data and writing the data to disk for the first
time. In so doing, information, such as FFID, number of shots, number
of channels are written to the database, and are then available when the
geometry is completed. Selecting this option will also stamp the output
dataset with valid trace numbers, which allows you to process with
trace headers only and overwrite the dataset with updated geometry
from the database files. This is an important concept for the Inline Geom
Header Load process.

In the following example, you will assume that only the FFID and
recording channel number exist in the incoming trace headers. This
information will be extracted, using the perform pre-geometry database
initialization option in Extract Database Files.

1-10 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Appendix 1: Additional Geometry Information

Pre Geometry Initialization flow


1. Make a new line called from pre-initialization.

2. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: A1.1-Pre-Geom Initialization

Add Delete Execute View Exit

SEGY Input
Type of storage: --------------------------------------- Disk Image
Enter DISK file path name: -----------------------------------------
-----------------------/misc_files/2d/segy_0_value_headers
MAXIMUM traces per ensemble: ---------------------------120
Remap SEGY header values: -------------------------------- NO
Extract Database Files
Is this a 3D survey: ------------------------------------------------No
Data Type: --------------------------------------------------------LAND
Source index method: -----------------------------------------FFID
Receiver index method: ------------------------------STATIONS
Mode of operation: ----------------------------------OVERWRITE
Pre-geometry extraction?: --------------------------------------Yes
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: ----------------Shots-raw data
New, or Existing, File?: ----------------------------------------New
Record length to output: ------------------------------------------0.
Trace sample format: ----------------------------------------16 bit
Skip primary disk Storage?: -----------------------------------No

3. Enter the parameters for the SEGY-Input process:

Enter the full path name to the SEGY input dataset as described by
the instructor.

There are 120 traces per ensemble.

4. In Extract Database Files, select to identify which traces belong to


which shots and receivers as follows:

Sources: identify by FFID.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-11


Appendix 1: Additional Geometry Information

Receivers: identify by STATIONS.

5. In Extract Database Files, select Yes for the option Pre-geometry


extraction.

This initializes the SIN and TRC domains of the Ordered Parameter
Files, stamps the dataset with valid trace numbers, and allows for the
use of overwrite mode when performing the Inline Geom Header
Load step later.

6. In Disk Data Output, enter the name for a new output file, such as
Shots-raw data.

7. Execute the flow.

After the Flow Completes


8. Exit the flow building level and select Database from the global
command line.

9. Check the OPFs, verifying the number of records in the dataset, the
number of channels/record, and the FFID range.

The only OPF files that should exist are LIN, SIN, and TRC. If SRF
exists, this means that you identified traces for receivers by
coordinates. You will also find that the SRF OPF has 1 value in it.

Complete the Spreadsheet


In this sequence, the next steps would be to complete the Sources,
Receivers and Patterns Spreadsheets and perform the CDP binning
similarly to the sequence used in Chapter 1: Geometry Assignment.

1-12 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Appendix 1: Additional Geometry Information

Inline Geometry Header Load after Pre Initialization

In this sequence, we ran the Extract Database Files process in the pre-
initialization mode. Here, we will read the output data from the pre-
initialization step and identify a trace relative to its valid trace number
with respect to the database.

Load Geometry to Trace Headers


1. If the geometry in the database looks good, build the following flow:

Editing Flow: A1.2-Load Geom to Headers and QC

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Read data from other lines/surveys: ----------------------No
Select Dataset: --------------------------------Shots-raw data
Trace read option: --------------------------------------------Get All
Read the data multiple times?: -------------------------------No
Process trace headers only?: ---------------------------------Yes
Override input datas sample interval: --------------------No
Inline Geom Header Load
Match by valid trace number?: ------------------------------Yes
Drop traces with NULL CDP headers?: --------------------No
Drop traces with NULL receiver headers?: ---------------No
Verbose Diagnostics?: --------------------------------------------No
Disk Data Output
Output Dataset Filename: ----------------Shots-raw data
New, or Existing, File?: --------------------------------Overwrite
Record length to output: ------------------------------------------0.
Trace sample format: ----------------------------------------16 bit
Skip primary disk Storage?: -----------------------------------No

2. In Disk Data Input, enter your input shot dataset.

In this sequence, we only process the trace headers.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 1-13


Appendix 1: Additional Geometry Information

3. In Inline Geom Header Load, match the traces by their valid trace
numbers.

Since the traces were read and counted with Extract Database Files,
you have a valid trace number to identify a trace. You have binned
all traces; therefore, do not drop any traces. Unless you have a
problem, there is no need for verbose diagnostics.

4. In Disk Data Output, output to the same dataset as specified in Disk


Data Input.

We will use the overwrite option in conjunction with trace header


only processing in the Disk Data Input.

5. Execute this flow.

In the Extract Database Files path, the Inline Geom Header Load
process operates on a sequential trace basis, and includes a check to
verify that the current FFID and channel information described in the
OPFs matches the FFID and channel information found on each trace of
each ensemble. The Inline Geom Header Load process will fail if these
numbers do not correspond. You must then correct the situation by
changing the geometry found in the OPFs, or possibly by changing the
input dataset attributes.

1-14 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Appendix 2
Supergathers
Supergathers are ensembles which were created by combining two or more regular CDPs to form
a single ensemble. Supergathers are commonly used for velocity analysis and quality control,
post-NMO mute definition, and any other processes which might benefit from reduced spatial
separation between traces in a CDP gather.

ProMAX incorporates the functionality to create supergathers in a number of analysis and quality
control processes. Examples include: Velocity Analysis, Interactive Velocity Analysis, and
Velocity Quality Control. This exercise is useful to help understand the mechanism employed in
creating supergathers in these various processes.

Topics covered in this chapter:

Create Supergather
Create Supergather and Horizontally Stack

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 2-1


Appendix 2: Supergathers

Create Supergather

Creating supergathers is really a matter of redefining a trace flag which


establishes the end-of-ensemble. In other words, how the traces are
grouped. The header word is called the End-of-ensemble flag
(END_ENS) and its value is either 1 or 0 (one or zero). When
END_ENS = 1, this alerts any process that the last trace in an ensemble
has been reached, such as shot record, CDP, or offset gather. This way,
if a process redefines the value for the END_ENS header word, then it
is able to regroup the traces. The following exercise will illustrate how
you may control trace grouping with a process called Ensemble Stack/
Combine.

1. Build a simple flow to input and display three CDPs.

Editing Flow: A2.1-Create Supergather

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: ----------------------------------Shot-decon/elev
Trace read option: -----------------------------------------------Sort
Interactive Data Access?: ---------------------------------------No
Select primary trace header entry: -----------------------CDP
Sort order for dataset: -------------------------------- 850-852/
Automatic Gain Control
----Default all parameters----
>Ensemble Stack/Combine<
Trace Display
Number of ENSEMBLES (line segments)/screen: -------3
Primary trace LABELING header entry: ----------------CDP
Secondary trace LABELING header entry: ------OFFSET

2. In Disk Data Input, select a dataset with some initial processing


applied, such as edits, mutes, and gain. Sort by CDPs 850-852.

2-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Appendix 2: Supergathers

3. In Trace Display, set the Number of ensembles/screen large enough


to allow all three CDPs on the screen at one time.

Also, label primary and secondary header entries as CDP and


OFFSET in the Trace Display menu.

4. Execute the flow.

Your screen should look similar to the following:

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 2-3


Appendix 2: Supergathers

5. Use the Header icon to display several trace headers.

The value of the End-of-ensemble flag (END_ENS) header word


can change from trace to trace. Be sure to check the last trace in any
one of the ensembles. What is different?

2-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Appendix 2: Supergathers

6. Activate Ensemble Stack/Combine in your flow to create one super-


CDP.

Select Combine only for the Type of Operation, inputting three


ensembles per output ensemble. This option will only reset the
END_ENS flag for the first three CDPs so that the result is one single
CDP. Also in this menu, select primary and secondary header words
as OFFSET.

Editing Flow: A2.1-Create Supergather

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Automatic Gain Control
Ensemble Stack/Combine
Type of operation: ---------------------------------Combine Only
Input ensembles per output ensemble: ----------------------3
Maximum traces per output ensemble: --------------------60
Warnings if max traces/ensemble exceeded?: --------Yes
Select PRIMARY Trace Order Header Word: ----------CDP
Average the primary key values?: ---------------------------No
Average the X and Y coordinates of primary key?: --No
Select SECONDARY Trace Order Header Word: -----------
---------------------------------------------------------OFFSET
Output trace secondary key order: --------------Ascending
Trace Display

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 2-5


Appendix 2: Supergathers

7. Execute the flow and compare your results to the original. It should
look similar to the following:

You might use this type of operation to create a super-CDP with


better offset coverage prior to Velocity Analysis.

2-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Appendix 2: Supergathers

Create Supergather and Horizontally Stack

1. Insert NMO into the Create Supergather flow.

The velocity function you use is not too critical. The reason for
NMO will be clear in the next step.

Editing Flow: A2.2-Create & Stack Supergather

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Normal Moveout Correction
SELECT Velocity parameter file: ---------------------------------
------------------------------------imported from ascii file
Automatic Gain Control
Ensemble Stack/Combine
Type of operation: -------------------------Combine and Stack
Input ensembles per output ensemble: ----------------------3
How are trace headers determined?: --------------Average
Secondary key bin size: ---------------------------------------350
Maximum traces per output ensemble: --------------------60
Warnings if max traces/ensemble exceeded?: --------Yes
Select PRIMARY Trace Order Header Word: ----------CDP
Average the primary key values?: ---------------------------No
Average the X and Y coordinates of primary key?: ---No
Select SECONDARY Trace Order Header Word: -----------
---------------------------------------------------------OFFSET
Output trace secondary key order: --------------Ascending
Trace Display

2. Modify Ensemble Stack/Combine to use the Combine and Stack


option for the type of operation.

After making this selection you will see a new parameter called
Secondary Key Bin Size which was previously hidden. Set this value
to 350.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 2-7


Appendix 2: Supergathers

3. Execute the flow.

Notice the difference between this display and your last. Why are
they different this time?

One observation that should jump out is that there are fewer traces
on the screen. This is due to the summation of adjacent traces
performed by the Stack portion of the Combine and Stack option.
The summation is dependent on which header word you select as a
secondary key, and by the secondary key bin size.

You might use this type of operation to reduce the amount of data
going into a Prestack Migration.

2-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Appendix 3
Alternate Velocity Analysis
Methods
Besides the Velocity Analysis tool covered earlier in this book, ProMAX has several other
velocity analysis options available. Two of these methods will be covered in this chapter.

Topics covered in this chapter:

CVS (Constant Velocity Stack) Analysis


IVA (Interactive Velocity Analysis)

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 3-1


Appendix 3: Alternate Velocity Analysis Methods

CVS Analysis

CVS Analysis is a macro process. CVS can be helpful in areas of


complex structure where velocity trends can change along the seismic
section. Constant velocity stacks of the entire line or a subset are
produced for a specified range of velocities. Horizons may be easier to
track if the whole section is seen. Random picks can be made on any
constant velocity stack panel and a final gridded velocity table is output.

Creating constant velocity stacks can be a time consuming event


especially if you have a large dataset with many panels to create. In this
case you may want to use the process Constant Velocity Stacks to create
and output the CVS panels ahead of time. Then Stack Display can be
used to display and pick the velocities the same way as done with the
macro.

3-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Appendix 3: Alternate Velocity Analysis Methods

1. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: A3.1-CVS

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: -----------------------Shots-decon/refr statics
Trace read option: -----------------------------------------------Sort
Interactive Data Access?: ---------------------------------------No
Select primary trace header entry: -----------------------CDP
Sort order for dataset: ---------------------------------------------*/
CVS Analysis
Apply AGC to the data?: ---------------------------------------Yes
AGC operator length: --------------------------------------------500
Maximum wavelet stretch: --------------------------------------30
Velocity input option: ----------------------------------Calculated
Minimum velocity: ----------------------------------------------7000
Maximum velocity: -------------------------------------------17000
Number of velocity panels: -------------------------------------16
Select display DEVICE: -----------------------------This Screen
Number of trace per display screen: ----------------------215
Do you wish to SCROLL your data?: -----------------------No
Trace scaling option: -----------------------------------Individual
SCALAR for sample value multiplication: ------------------1.

2. Select Disk Data Input parameters.

A Disk Data Input step is required since it is not included within the
macro. Data should be preprocessed gathers without NMO and
should have a bandpass filter and scaling function applied. Sort to
CDP and include the range of CDPs to be stacked. For this exercise,
use all the CDPs in the line.

3. In CVS Analysis, apply an AGC prior to stacking with constant


velocities.

Specify the minimum, maximum velocity and number of velocity


panels. Enter 7000 - 15000 ft/sec for an velocity range and create
16 panels.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 3-3


Appendix 3: Alternate Velocity Analysis Methods

4. Select the number of traces to display per screen and an appropriate


trace scaling option, such as Individual. Selecting Individual as the
trace scaling option will make sure that spikes do not dominate the
display.

5. Execute the flow with MB2.

The display will appear in the old Stack Display tool. The last
constant velocity panel will appear along with 16 screen swap boxes
in the upper right of the display.

6. Click on the Pick icon to create a pick table.

Click on Pick CVS/CVM panels Create new file and name it


cvs vels.

7. Activate the CVS/CVM picking mode.

3-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Appendix 3: Alternate Velocity Analysis Methods

Move the cursor to the screen swap boxes in the upper right hand
corner of the display and use MB2 to enable picking of the CVS
panels.

NOTE:

You should see all the icons disappear except for the scroll icon and you should be
able to move your cursor into the data area. If you dont see the scroll icon and your
cursor remains in the screen swap boxes, you are not in CVS/CVM picking mode.
To correct this error, click MB1 in the screen swap boxes and then click MB2 in the
screen swap boxes. You should see the scroll icon remaining and you should be able
to move your cursor into the data area.

8. Pick velocities on the display by using MB1.

Move your cursor into the displayed stacked section. While holding
down MB2, move the cursor back and forth within the stacked
section. This will enable the screen swapping.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 3-5


Appendix 3: Alternate Velocity Analysis Methods

Once you have found a velocity panel that stacks an event best, use
MB1 to make a pick and to display it on-screen.

You can manually enter a velocity value at your cursor location by


double clicking MB1. A pop-up box will appear in the upper left
hand corner of the display. You may now type in a velocity value. Hit
enter to accept. This can be useful if the desired velocity falls
between the displayed panel velocities.

9. To finish picking, click MB1 on any of the screen swap boxes in the
upper right hand corner of the display.

10. Click the red Stop icon to exit the display.

Choose Save all work to the database before quitting.

NOTE:

Upon exiting the CVS Analysis display, two velocity tables are written to disk. One
file contains just the picks you made in the CVS Analysis display. The second file
is a fully interpolated velocity table based on the sparse picks you made on-screen.

3-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Appendix 3: Alternate Velocity Analysis Methods

Interactive Velocity Analysis (IVA)

Interactive Velocity Analysis is a standalone process that allows


comprehensive velocity analysis and quality control of a new or existing
velocity field. IVA combines displays of semblances, velocity fans,
stacks, gathers and an isovel plot for interactive picking of a velocity
field. With the use of active image, you see the appearance of real time
moveout and stacking as the cursor is moved within the velocity fans.
Since IVA has many options and interactive capabilities, this exercise is
designed to teach you the basic functionality of the program. Consult the
Reference Manual for more specific details about a particular operation.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 3-7


Appendix 3: Alternate Velocity Analysis Methods

1. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: A3.2-IVA

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Interactive Vel Analysis*


Operation Mode: --------------------------------Fully Interactive
Input trace data file: --------------Shots-decon/refr statics
Minimum CDP on line: ------------------------------------------775
Maximum CDP on line: -----------------------------------------989
Increment CDP on line: ---------------------------------------------1
Dataset CDP Restriction: ------------------All available data
Super Gathers Options: -----------------------Common Offset
Minimum Offset bin center: ----------------------------------27.5
Maximum Offset bin center: --------------------------------6500
Common Offset bin center Inc: --------------------------------55
Common Offset bin Width: --------------------------------------55
Adjacent CDPs in Super Gather: -------------------------------9
Input (Initial) Velocity Table: -----imported from ascii file
Output Velocity Table: ------------------------------------IVA vels
Provide CDP mute Table?: --------------------------------------No
Provide Horizon DATA Table?: --------------------------------No
Minimum velocity: ----------------------------------------------7000
Maximum velocity: -------------------------------------------17000
Velocity Uncertainty at Tzero: -------------------------------900
Velocity Uncertainty at Tmax: -----------------------------3600
Interval Vel. below last knee: ----------------------------17500
Maximum Frequency: ---------------------------------------------70
Number of functions: ----------------------------------------------17
Span in CDPs for flip stack panels: --------------------------7
NMO Stretch Percent to allow: ---------------------------------30
Horizontal Enlargement Factor: ---------------------------0.75
Vertical Enlargement Factor: --------------------------------0.75

3-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Appendix 3: Alternate Velocity Analysis Methods

2. Select Fully Interactive for the Operation Mode.

Fully Interactive allows you to choose random locations once IVA is


displayed and does not involve any precomputation.

Precompute then Interactive allows you to specify CDPs at which to


precompute analyses. Once IVA is displayed, you can move between
locations more quickly. However, other random locations can still be
selected.

3. Select your range of data to process.

IVA allows the selection of a specific range of CDPs to process or


All Available Data. Supergathers can also be created for analysis.

4. Select or create the Input (Initial) and Output velocity Table.

The input velocity table and the output velocity table can be the same
file or a new output table can be added. The output table is
continuously updated as each new velocity function is picked.

5. Provide a CDP Mute Table and/or a Horizon Data Table.

A post NMO mute table can be supplied provided it was created as


a function of CDP:AOFFSET, or one can be created and
interactively picked once IVA is running. The same can be done for
a horizon data table.

6. Enter velocity information and maximum frequency of data.

The menu asks for a minimum and a maximum velocity of interest


plus an interval velocity below the last picked time or knee. For this
data use a velocity range of 7000-17000 ft/sec and an interval
velocity of 17500 ft/sec.

Velocity Uncertainty at Tzero and Tmax basically defines the


bounds of your velocity fan. For example the default uses 900 ft/sec
for Tzero meaning the fan will be no wider than 1800 ft/sec (900 on
each side of the reference function) at Tzero.

The maximum frequency of the data is requested simply to


internally resample the data to optimize screen resolution and
execution time. It is not a filter. 70 Hz is reasonable for this data.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 3-9


Appendix 3: Alternate Velocity Analysis Methods

7. Enter the number of velocity functions and number of CDPs for the
stack panels.

As the number of velocity functions increases, the resolution


improves, but the run time and resource requirements also increase.
For this data, you can get adequate resolution using 15-17 velocity
functions and 7 consecutive CDPs in the stack panels.

8. Execute the flow with MB2.

The initial display includes a semblance plot, an isovel plot and a


portion of the data stacked with the input velocity table.

9. Scan your data.

The portion of the stacked data displayed is defined by the rectangle


box in the isovel plot. Use MB3 with the cursor located in either the
stack or the isovel to scroll through the data. Clicking on MB3 will

3-10 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Appendix 3: Alternate Velocity Analysis Methods

quickly jump to a new location on the isovel plot. The size of the box
in the isovel plot is controlled by the Horizontal and Vertical
Enlargement Factor.

NOTE:

The mouse button helps are very important in this process because they change
according to where the cursor is located on the screen.

10. Select your CDP analysis location by clicking MB2 for a


previously picked location or MB1 for a new location. CDP
numbers are displayed below the stack section along with time and
velocity.

Use MB1 to pop up a menu with analysis mode options. Select


Semblance, Stacks and Gathers. In the lower right corner of the
screen the Notification Window shows that the stack, semblance and
gather images are being computed.

11. Click on Config and select Expand/UnExpand Top.

This option appears below the semblance plot and allows the
reconfiguration of the display. Eliminate the isovel plot to allow
more room for the semblance, stack and gather.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 3-11


Appendix 3: Alternate Velocity Analysis Methods

12. Begin picking the velocity function by clicking on Pick. Select


Velocity Function from the Pick Operation menu.

A message appears in the notification window that reads Picking


Function Auto_scroll enabled. You can freely scroll the mouse up
and down the display. MB1 adds a control point (knee) to your
function and MB3 deletes a control point. As you move the cursor
within the calculated functions, the active screen images change
within the flip stack and gather. Once you have finished picking your
velocity function, while keeping the cursor within the semblance
plot, use MB2 to save and write the function to the velocity table. Go
back to the Config option and UnExpand your window. Your
function is displayed as a downline in the isovels plot. Start again
and select a new CDP location for analysis.

13. Changing the velocity bounds of your fan is possible by using the
Vbound option located to the right of Pick.

Click here and the notification window reads Picking Vbound 1.


Auto_scroll enabled. Use MB1 to add control points to the lower
vbound (left side). When you are finished, click MB2 and the
notification window reads Picking Vbound 2. Auto_scroll
enabled. Use MB1 to select your control points for the upper
vbound. When finished, MB2 recomputes a new velocity fan with
new gather and stack panels.

14. Mute Analysis can be run at any CDP location. Click on your
analysis location.

When the Analysis Mode menu pops up, select Mute Analysis. Wait
for the computations to complete. Follow the same instructions as
picking a function, click on the Pick option and select Top Mute
from the menu. You will notice in the gather display that mute points
have already been selected. To choose your own mute, use MB1 to
select time/aoffset points. When finished, use MB2 to save the
output. Gathers and stacks are recalculated and you are prompted to
Update the Semblance. A mark is displayed on the isovel where the
analysis was done. Your mute is saved in the Parameter File menu
for Mute Gates and is automatically labeled as IVA with a time/date
stamp.

15. Restack Line.

To restack your line with the new velocities, click on Action and
select Restack Line from the popup menu. The notification window
informs you that your CDPs are being restacked.

3-12 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Appendix 3: Alternate Velocity Analysis Methods

16. Exit.

When you are ready to exit IVA, use the Exit located at the bottom
of the screen. Select from the menu to either save to the database or
to abort the IVA session. Your velocity table can be found in the
Parameter Files for RMS (stacking) Velocity menu.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 3-13


Appendix 3: Alternate Velocity Analysis Methods

3-14 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis Landmark


Appendix 4
Database/Header Manipulation
The database is critical to ProMAX. Many processing attributes, such as statics and first break
picks are kept in the database. In this chapter we examine the links between the database and the
trace headers by determining first break linear moveout corrections. We will also create and alter
trace headers and database attributes.

Topics covered in this chapter:

Header Manipulation Processes

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 4-1


Appendix 4: Database/Header Manipulation

Header Manipulation Processes

This exercise uses the following ProMAX Header Manipulation


processes:

Trace Header Math: Trace header math has four modes of


operation. The first three allow you to modify and/or create trace
headers and the last changes global runtime attributes of the data,
such as forcing the time to be depth. We will use the application
called Fixed Equation Mode which allows us to create or modify
headers using a mathematical function on existing header entries
and constants.

Database/Header Transfer: This process transfers up to 8 values at a


time between the database and the trace headers. The transferred
value can be loaded into an existing database attribute or trace
header name, or you can create your own names. However, if you
create your own database attribute, a random number represents the
database name and the description is what you typed in. This
random number can be changed to a meaningful name using the
new/copy option in the database.

Header Statics: This process applies statics to traces from header


words or applies bulk shift statics.

Apply a Linear Moveout Correction


In this exercise, you will compute and apply a linear moveout (LMO)
correction to the data. This will create a new trace header that you can
transfer to the database. Finally you will view your new attribute in the
database.

4-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark


Appendix 4: Database/Header Manipulation

1. Build the following flow:

Editing Flow: A4.1-Trace Header/Database Manip

Add Delete Execute View Exit

Disk Data Input


Select dataset: ----------------------------Shots-with geometry
Trace Header Math
Select mode: ----------------------------------------Fixed equation
DEFINE trace header equation: ----------------------------------
-------------------LMO=100-(AOFFSET/8000)*1000
Database/Header Transfer
Direction of transfer: ---From Trace header to database
Number of parameters: --------------------------------------------1
First database parameter: -----------------------------------------
---------------------TRC:Geometry:New - Enter LMO
First Header Entry: ---------------------------------------------LMO
Header Statics
Bulk shift static: ------------------------------------------------------0
What about previous statics?: ---Add to previous statics
Apply how many static header entries?: -------------------1
First Header word to apply: ---------------------------------LMO
HOW to apply header statics?: -----------------------------Add
Apply Fractional Static
Trace Display
Specify display END time: ------------------------------------500
Number of display panels: ---------------------------------------4

2. In Disk Data Input, input your raw shots with applied geometry.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 4-3


Appendix 4: Database/Header Manipulation

3. In Trace Header Math, create a static for applying a linear moveout


correction to your data. The following equation creates the LMO
static time:

LMO = 100 - (AOFFSET/8000) * 1000 where:

100 is a bulk shift to move the trace samples away from time zero by
100 ms.

8000 is the refractor velocity.

1000 converts seconds to ms.

Except for the near offsets, the final LMO corrections are fairly large
negative numbers.

4. Select Database/Header Transfer parameters.

Select to Load FROM trace header TO database. For First


database parameter select TRC: Geometry: New to enter a name for
your LMO static header and make it Floating Point. For First
Header entry select User Defined and enter LMO.

5. Select Header Statics parameters.

Add the LMO header entry, created in the Trace Header Math, to the
previous statics.

6. Set the Trace Display parameters.

You may find that setting this display to four panels, and limiting the
time range from 0 to 500 ms is useful.

7. Execute the flow, and observe the effects of the LMO.

8. View your new LMO attribute in the database.

4-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark


Appendix 5
Training Summary
This summary may be used as a quick reference for some of the most useful charts of information
you have worked with during the week.

Topics covered in this chapter:

Reference Tables
Reference Graphs
Flows and Data Summaries

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-1


Appendix 5: Training Summary

Reference Tables

Organization of Ordered Parameter Files

LIN (Line) Contains constant line information, such as final datum, type of
units, source type, total number of shots.

TRC (Trace) Contains information varying by trace, such as FB Picks, trim


statics, source-receiver offsets.

SRF Contains information varying by surface receiver location, such


(Surface location) as surface location x,y coordinates, surface location elevations,
surface location statics, number of traces received at each
surface location, and receiver fold.

SIN Contains information varying by source point, such as source


(Source Index #) x,y coordinates, source elevations, source uphole times, nearest
surface location to source, source statics.

CDP (Common Contains information varying by CDP location, such as CDP x,y
Depth Point) coordinates, CDP elevation, CDP fold, nearest surface location.

CHN (Channel) Contains information varying by channel number, such as


channel gain constants and channel statics.

OFB Contains information varying by offset bin number, such as


(Offset Bin) surface consistent amplitude analysis. OFB is created when
certain processes are run, such as surface consistent amplitude
analysis.

PAT (Pattern) Contains information describing the recording patterns.

The Ordered Parameter Files database stores information in structured


categories, known as Orders, representing unique sets of information
applying to an individual line.

5-2 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark


Appendix 5: Training Summary

PostStack Migration Summary

Migration Name Category Type Velocity V(x) V(t/z) Steep Rel


Dip Times

Memory Stolt F-K F-K Time VRMS(x,t) Poor Poor Fair 0.2

Phase Shift Phase Shift Time VINT(t) None Good Good 1.0

Fast Explicit FD Time FD Time VINT(x,t) Fair Good Fair 9.6

Steep Dip Explicit FD FD (70 deg) Time VINT(x,t) Fair Good Good 21.0
Time FD (50 deg) Time VINT(x,t) Fair Good Fair 10.0

Kirchhoff Time Kirchhoff Time VRMS(x,t) Fair Good Good 14.6

Reverse Time T-K Reverse Time Time VINT(t) None Good Good 2.5

Explicit FD Depth FD Depth VINT(x,z) Good Good Good 21.7

Kirchhoff Depth Imp.Eikonal Depth VINT(x,z) Fair Good Good 7.3


Max.Amp. Depth VINT(x,z) Good Good Good 12.0
Mult. Arr. Depth VINT(x,z) Excel. Excel. Excel. 64.0

To help you decide on the optimal migration for a given situation, the
above table is a summary of the poststack migrations and how they
handle changes in velocity and dip.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-3


Appendix 5: Training Summary

Datum Statics Apply

For Elevation Statics For Refraction Statics

1) Remove previously applied 1) Remove previously applied


statics if TOT_STAT not equal 0 statics if TOT_STAT not equal 0

2) Compute S_STATIC and 2) COPY refraction statics to


R
R_STATIC to Final Datum S_STATIC and R_STATIC

3) Compute N_DATUM 3) Compute N_DATUM


(smooth surface / processing (smooth surface / processing
datum) datum)

4) Partition the statics into 4) Partition the statics into


PRE and POST NMO terms PRE and POST NMO terms
----- NMO_STAT (pre) ----- NMO_STAT (pre)
----- FNL_STAT (post) ----- FNL_STAT (post)

5) Apply the PRE NMO term 5) Apply the PRE NMO term
NMO_STAT NMO_STAT

6) Update NA_STAT and 6) Update NA_STAT and


TOT_STAT in the Trace TOT_STAT in the Trace
Headers Headers

ProMAX uses the above logic when applying datum statics. Refer to the
following Datum Statics Terminology graph for a further description
of the statics variables.

5-4 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark


Appendix 5: Training Summary

Reference Graphs

Datum Statics Terminology

S.P. CDP

Receiver
N_DATUM
Vweathering NMO_STAT
Surface
Elevation
NMO_STAT
Shot
Vreplacement
Base
Weathering
FNL_STAT
S_STATIC C_STATIC R_STATIC

F_DATUM

Database Attributes:
N_DATUM = floating datum

F_DATUM = final datum

S_STATIC = (F_DATUM - ELEV + DEPTH) / DATUMVEL

R_STATIC = [(F_DATUM - ELEV + DEPTH) / DATUMVEL] - UPHOLE

C_STATIC = 2 * [(N_DATUM - F_DATUM) / DATUMVEL]

Trace Header Values:


N_DATUM = floating datum
NMO_STAT = S_STATIC + R_STATIC + C_STATIC
FNL_STAT = - C_STATIC
TOT_STAT = cumulative applied statics
NA_STAT = statics less than one sample period which are not-yet-applied

(If TOT_STAT = 21.2 ms, and the sample period is 4 ms,


NA_STAT = 1.2 ms)

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-5


Appendix 5: Training Summary

Geometry Assignment Map

All Possible Geometry Assignment Paths

UKOOA ASCII
O.B. Field
Data
Notes

UKOOA
Import SEG-? Input
Spreadsheet
Manual Import
Input
Database
Import
Seismic Data
(ProMAX)
Extract
Database
Files
Geometry Inline Geom
Spreadsheet Header Load

Ordered Parameter Disk Data


Output
Files
Disk Data
Output

Inline Geom
Header Load
Valid Trace
Numbers
Overwrite
Trace Headers
Seismic Data Seismic Data
(ProMAX) (ProMAX)

5-6 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark


Appendix 5: Training Summary

Promax Directory Structure


$PROMAX_HOME /sys /exe
(default=.../ProMAX) exec.exe /frame
super_exec.exe /sdi
*.exe from program /3rd party
software
/bin
*.exe from command line

/lib
lib*.a

/plot
/port /help /promax
*.lok - Frame help
/lib/X11/app-defaults *.help -ASCII help
Application window /promax3d
managers
/promaxvsp
/menu /promax
*.menu
Processes
/promax3d
/promaxvsp
/misc
*_stat_math
*.rgb-colormaps
ProMax_defaults
/bin
start-up executable
/etc

config_file
product
install.doc
pvmhosts
qconfig
license.dat

/scratch

/queues

/data /area /line


(or $PROMAX_DATA_HOME)

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-7


Appendix 5: Training Summary

Promax Data Directories

PROMAX_DATA_HOME
or
/Data

/Area
DescName Area subdirectory
and its files
Project
/Line
DescName
17968042TVEL
31790267TGAT 1) Parameter Table files
36247238TMUT
12345678CIND
Index and Map Dataset files
12345678CMAP
/12345678
HDR1 2) Dataset subdirectory
HDR2 and Header and Trace
Dataset files
TRC1
TRC2

/Flow1
DescName
TypeName 3) A Flow subdirectory
and its files
job.output
packet.job

/OPF.SIN 4) /OPF.SIN Database


subdirectory and
OPF60_SIN.GEOMETRY.ELEV
a non-spanned file

/OPF.SRF Database
/OPF.SRF subdirectory and a
#s0_OPF60_SRF.GEOMETRY.ELEV span file

Understanding the ProMAX directory structure and file naming


conventions will be crucial for debugging flows and managing disk
space.

5-8 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark


Appendix 5: Training Summary

Flows and Data Summaries

Flows

Upon completion of the course your flows menu should look similar to
the above.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-9


Appendix 5: Training Summary

Datasets: Seismic

Upon completion of the course your processing should have created the
above datasets. Note: how the naming convention allows for clues as to
the datasets contents.

5-10 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark


Appendix 5: Training Summary

Datasets: OPF-TRC

The TRC trace database is the largest of the Ordered Parameter Files
since it contains information varying by trace, such as FB Picks, trim
statics, source-receiver offsets. Note: the format in the database table is
variable name, variable/info type, and variable description.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-11


Appendix 5: Training Summary

Datasets: OPF-SRF

The SRF receivers OPF contains information varying by surface


receiver location, such as surface location x, y coordinates, surface
location elevations, surface location statics, number of traces received at
each surface location and receiver fold.

5-12 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark


Appendix 5: Training Summary

Datasets: OPF-SIN

The SIN source OPF contains information varying by source point,


such as source x, y coordinates, source elevations, source uphole times,
nearest surface location to source, and source statics.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-13


Appendix 5: Training Summary

Datasets: OPF-CDP

The CDP OPF contains information varying by CDP location, such as


CDP x, y coordinates, CDP elevation, and CDP fold nearest surface
location.

5-14 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark


Appendix 5: Training Summary

Datasets: OPF-CHN

The CHN channel OPF contains information varying by channel


number, such as channel gain constants and channel statics.

Datasets: OPF-OFB

The OPF offset bin OPF contains information varying by offset bin
number, such as surface consistent amplitude analysis. OFB is created
when certain processes are run, such as surface consistent amplitude
analysis.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-15


Appendix 5: Training Summary

Datasets: OPF-PAT

The PAT pattern OPF contains information describing the recording


patterns.

5-16 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark


Appendix 5: Training Summary

The End

ProMAX 2D
Seismic Processing and
Analysis
I hope the class was beneficial, wlf.

Landmark ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Analysis 5-17


Appendix 5: Training Summary

5-18 ProMAX 2D Seismic Processing and Anlaysis Landmark

You might also like